Create a set offset from a selected alignment.
Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from an alignment.
The default horizontal and vertical offsets may be set to non-zero values.
If a VAL is also selected from the Profile View, points are created with elevations interpolated from the VAL, adjusted by the vertical offset, otherwise the points are 2D.
The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. The default VAL is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if possible.
See also GC28, GC99 and SIDESLOPE.
| 01/09/11 | RG 569 | Cogo\Streets\3D | S | 77 |
Filter superfluous points from a DTM.
This is useful for filtering point clouds generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and other large DTMs where much of the data is not significant.
Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume. The filtered points be made moved to layer 0 or made non-contourable, and the point colour is also modified.
- Max Triangle Grade
- Filter out spikes and troughs. If all triangles about a point exceed the enter value and all are either sloping away (peak) or sloping toward (trough) then the point is removed.
- Max Common Side Grade Diff
- Filter out points where the triangles about the point have a Common Side grade range within the value entered. Look at all the triangles about a point and check to see if or grades are within the entered range. If so the point is removed. This filters large triangles of similar grades.
- Max Volume Diff
- Filter points that make a difference to the volume less than the value entered. The volume down to a datum is worked out using just the triangles about a point. The volume is then worked out with the point tested removed. If the volume difference is less than the stated value the point is removed. Filters small triangles with little change to the volume, even with large slope variations.
- Max Effective Area
- Filter points where the total area of all the triangles around the point is less than the value stated. This leaves large triangles unchanged.
- Max Number of iterations
- Reform the DTM and filter again until the maximum number of iterations. If zero, continue until less than 10% is removed in the last iteration.
- Colour of Removed Points
- Set the colour of the filtered points. Points can be then deleted by colour.
- Move Filtered Points to layer zero.
- Filtered points are either moved to layer 0 or made non-contourable.
- Keep Points on Breaklines.
- Protect points that lie on a breakline.
- Keep Points on DTM Edge.
- Protect remove points on the DTM Edge.
- Keep Points > 3 Standard Deviations.
- Protect points that are outside 3 standard deviations from the newly formed DTM surface.
- Generate Report.
- Report to P3Pad.
See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets, GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 which changes and identifies non-contourable points. GCGEOCODE is a separate application, which can quickly filter points not close to an average surface model.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Create MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.
Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad.
MCA files are the input files for the Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. Some newer Topcon 3D machine control systems use DXF instead. Check with your Topcon dealer.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Report 3D lengths and angles of a set.
Report the record number and name of a set, then the following values for each point: Back Point Number, Intersection Point Number, Forward Point Number, True 3D Angle, 3D Chainage of Intersection Point, Horizontal Deflection Angle, Vertical Deflection Angle, Bearing In, Bearing Out, 3D Distance In, 3D Distance Out, Zenith Angle In, Zenith Angle Out, Slope In and Slope Out.
This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks.
The report can also be written as a CSV fle.
See also PIPEINFO
| 01/09/11 | \Reports\More...\Pipe lengths | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.
Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.
- Curve
- Abbreviations for circular curves. Each label can have a maximum of eight characters. You can use any ASCII character in a prefix label by entering "\" and the number of the character. For example, enter \131 for the delta symbol in TMODELF.FNT.
- Spiral
- Abbreviations for spiral curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
- Vertical
- Abbreviations for vertical curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
- Table
- Line and curve table headings for LABELTABLE. Each label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
- Point
- Abbreviations for point names. Each prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters. These abbreviations are only used by commands that create points along an alignment at positions where IP or curve information are listed.
| Command | Settings\Abbreviations | S |
Report Terramodel version number and modules.
Report Terramodel version number, Terramodel Toolpak version, copyright details, and list Modules.
If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. If you were expecting other modules, including CAD, see www.geocomp.com.au/support/dongle.html.
Click on the Modules button to see the list of modules:
- Family
- List modules for families of Trimble products other than Terramodel
- Serial Number
- The serial number is also the licence number written on the key. The - extension indicates the number of times the key has been updated with different modules.
- Lock version
- The lock version enables certain versions of Terramodel.
- Days of trial
- The number of days remaining on any trial period
- Order form
- Report the modules and purchase code details to printer or email
- Upgrade
- Enter Upgrade codes when requested by a Trimble dealer.
See also GCHELP.
| Command | Help\About | S | CG M |
Set, clear or list the current active alignment.
- Active alignment
- Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
- Set
- Make the set or pline the active alignment
- Clear
- Clear the active alignment
Active alignments are used for four main purposes:
- Select alignments quickly
- Reference objects to the alignment so that they can derive their chainage properties from the alignment
- Reference objects to the alignment so that during labeling the referenced objects can be replaced automatically
- Control the display visibility of referenced objects
See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER.
See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment.
PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if the are referenced to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected algnment is referenced to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.
| Command | UG 125 | Settings\Active alignment | S | 415 |
Set active chainage (station).
Set, clear or list the current active alignment and chainage.
If you selected US English during Terramodel installation, this command is called ACTIVESTATION and the command dialog and Settings menu will refer to Station. If British English, Chainage.
When cross sections are drawn in the cross section view mode using RDX, RDX_GC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC, this command controls which chainage will be displayed. When these commands create the cross sections each object is referenced to the alignment and given the chainage of the cross section as the elevation of the object. Only those objects that are referenced to the active alignment and chainage will be shown. If there is no active alignment or chainage then all cross sections will be displayed, generally on top of each other.
When any command creates objects in the cross section view the current active alignment and active chainage are used to make these objects a part of the cross section. If there is no active chainage or active alignment then any objects created will be displayed in any cross section.
These simple rules enable all cross sections to be created in the same coordinate system (on top of each other) and then viewed one cross section at a time. This allows you to use coordinates of offset and elevation to draw, edit, inverse and so on.
Options- Align
- Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
- Chainage
- Select the chainage along the alignment to be the current active chainage
- Next
- Make the next xline with a larger chainage, along the current active alignment, the current active chainage
- Previous
- Make the previous xline with a smaller chainage, along the current active alignment, the current active chainage
- Set
- Make the selected set or pline the active alignment, make the specified chainage the active chainage and exit the command
- Clear
- Clear the active alignment and active chainage
| Command | Settings\Active chainage or Settings\Active station | S | 410 |
Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.
Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.
| 20/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.
Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.
If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".
| 01/09/11 | U |
Add prefix or suffix to selected text.
A common use is to add parentheses around text.
Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Text\Prefix or suffix | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Add an image located by multiple plotboxes.
Add one image to multiple plot boxes.
The same image is added to image manager at the lower left and upper right extents of each selected plotbox.
These plotboxes may be evenly spaced using MATRIX.
If all the plotboxes are the same size and refer to a mastersheet, use ASAPIMAG.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.
Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, then add that depth to the elevation of selected points.
If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged.
See also GC54.
| 29/10/08 | DTM\Add isopach thickness | S | 240 |
Add tide corrections to depth records.
Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period.
The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time.
Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS.
Restore any HDMSRTR-rounded depths prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.
| 12/05/09 | built-in help | POA |
Adjust a lot to match a specified area.
See also PREDAREA.
In Terramodel 10 help, this TML is also called AdjustArea.
| 29/10/08 | Cogo\Lots\Adjust area | S |
Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.
Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves.
The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile.
The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.
| 11/09/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create and edit command aliases.
Use command aliases to call commands by command line, menu, toolbar or toolbox button, workspace using names and arguments of your choice.
ALIAS command edits the current aliases. If you use a text editor, changes will take effect when Terramodel is restarted.
ALIAS enables you to substitute for commands which need command line arguments or are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled or replaced. You can make your own for a local language, dialect, idiom or standard. For example:
| User action | Result | Example of |
| Type UNITSET | Execute UNITSSET | Common misspelling |
| Type FAVOURITE | Execute FAVORITES | Alternative spelling |
| Type FAVORITOS | Execute FAVORITES | Spanish language |
| Type COUNT | Count objects with OLIST | Rename obscure command |
| Type VOLUME | Execute EARTHWORK | Keep Terramodel 9.8 command |
| Execute THREEPC command | Execute GC3PTARC command | Substitute alternative command |
Click on  in Views toolbox |
Open Profile view using SVIEW | Command line argument and toolbox |
Click on  in VPAN toolbox |
Pan left by one screen | Command line argument and toolbox |
| Type Z or W | ZOOM using a window | Like AutoCAD |
| Type MOOZ | MAGNIFY the view scale by 0.5 to zoom out | Like SDRMap |
| Type DXFOUT or DWGOUT | Execute the AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) EXPORT script | Like AutoCAD |
| Type 17 | Measure 3D vector using GC29 | Like Geocomp |
| Type DCEDIT | Launch the Trimble DC File Editor | Launch an external application |
| Type CASCADE | Cascade views by "MACROPLAY Cascade" | Execute a macro |
Aliases should be defined in an ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). The alias.ini installed by the Geocomp Update (...\Terramodel\Geocomp\ALIAS.INI) has over 2000 aliases including French and Spanish commands.
If Terramodel is not finding your aliases, check the search path. If the correct ALIAS.INI is shown in TSP, then check whether there is a list of aliases in TMODWIN.INI. If so, these take precedence, so remove them and restart Terramodel.
Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command. The maximum argument is 66 characters. If you need to exceed this, see RUN.
You can't alias to an alias, but you can copy the command and arguments using ALIAS command.
To add comments to alias.ini, start the line with a semi-colon ";" so it is hidden in the Alias Editor.
See also TMLLIST.
| 01/09/11 | File\System Configuration\Command alias | S |
Import alignments from an ASCII text file.
Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-delimited file.
Browse or enter the filename.
The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created.
The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations.
The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].
- Plan (Y before X in View Settings OFF)
- East,North,[,Radius]
- Plan (with Y before X in View Settings ON)
- North,East[,Radius]
- Profile
- Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
- XSect
- Offset, Elevation[,Radius]
- Super
- Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
See also GC65FILE.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Import alignments offsets from a text file.
Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment.
These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.
- Browse to select the comma-delimited file.
- The format is assumed to be: Chainage, Offset.
- Pick the Pline or Set that you want to use for the registered HAL.
- Enter a name for the HAL to be registered. The default is the filename.
This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name.
See also GC65FILE.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Make text perpendicular to alignment.
Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment.
See also TEXTALIGN.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Text\Align to HAL | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Display all visible objects in the active view.
Refresh the current view at a scale such that all visible all objects, except objects in blocks, are within the window.
Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.
| Command | View\All | S | 131 |
Enable menus for entry by keyboard.
Enable the menu for key entry so you can then select a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse.
ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.
| Macro | S and User-definable |
Report angle-right between points.
Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point.
Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point.
Uses the current Angle Units setting.
If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed.
See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.
Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point".
ARC defaults to the last Type used.
If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC.
The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.
If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.
The Terramodel Help, this is called ARCS.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Pline\Arc | S | 21 |
Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.
The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations.
Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.
See also ARC, ARC2PSET and GCARC.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Arc\Pline by 2 points | Geocomp Update or $25 | 21 |
Create an arc set by two points and the radius.
The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point.
Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.
See also ARC, ARC2P and GCARC.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Arc\Set by 2 points | Geocomp Update or $25 | 21 |
Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.
Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.
The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.
The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.
See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.
| 01/09/11 | RG 1217 | DTM\Arc breaklines | S |
Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.
Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.
- Points
- Create the specified number of additional points per arc and replace the arc segments with new arcs.
- Chords
- Create the specified number of additional points per arc and replace the arc segments with chords.
- Arc to chord
- Create additional points and replace the arc segments with chords at the specified maximum distance from the arc to the chord.
The smoothness of the set is not changed so closed breaklines with dead smoothness still define dead areas for contours.
The maximum arc-to-chord is reported to indicate whether sufficient points were created.
See also GCARCBL which creates additional chords.
| 17/08/12 | Draw\Arc\Break into chords | Geocomp Update or $25 | 39 |
Toggle visibility of set arc centres.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\On/Off\Arc centres | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Report the area inside plines or sets.
Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.
- Line
- Report to message scroll the area of a single figure and the accumulated area after subsequent selections.
- Multiple
- Report to P3pad for each selected figure including the sum.
- Digitiser
- Report area inside selected locations, without creating having to create a new object.
The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET.
The message "Unable to get record's area" usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you cannot find where the set or pline crosses itself, you can get the area using GC10 and User Defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.
| Command | Reports\Area/Perimeter | S | 63 |
Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.
Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.
Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.
| Macro | Window\Arrange icons | S and User-definable |
Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.
Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet.
After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet.
The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet").
See also ADDIMAGE.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import an Ashtech points file
| 29/10/08 | S |
Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT file
Import N-values as decimal latitude and longitude into the current layer.
Use GCCOORD to convert to Easting Northing coordinates.
Use GC54 to subtract the N-value from ellipse height points.
For more information, go to Geoscience Australia.
For AusGeoid in Coordinate System manager, see CSMAN.
| 25/05/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create line, block and text features based on field codes.
AutoDraft is described in the Field Data Module User Guide.
See also BLKPTS, GCIMPORT, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, MAPPOINTS, MULTCODE, PTJOIN , PTLAYCOL and RELAYER.
| Command | Draft\Automated drafting from points | S | 125 |
Enable automatic saving of project files.
AutoSave automatically backs up the current project file at a user-specified time interval. Use this feature to protect your work from unexpected power failures or computer difficulties. The autosave file has the same title as your project file, but it has the *.SAV extension. The autosave file is saved in the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box.
To use AutoSave:
- Click FILE, Config System, and AutoSave [AutoSave].
- To turn AutoSave on or off, click the AutoSave On check box.
- To set the time interval for each autosave, type the time (in minutes) between autosaves into the Check Every box.
- To change the directory for autosave files:
- Turn off AutoSave (see step 2), and click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
- Find and click on the folder for the autosave files.
- Click OK. The new folder name appears in the Directory for AutoSave Files area.
- Turn on AutoSave if desired.
- Click OK.
AutoSave is a convenient safeguard for your work. If it does not automatically save your projects as you expect, see if you can determine the cause and resolve the issue yourself.
Recommendations:
- Check to see if you have enough disk space. The drive may be full. If you have little or no room on the disk drive, delete unneeded files, archive old files, or obtain a larger hard drive.
- Check to see a directory used by Terramodel was deleted.
- Make sure your network server is working properly if your computer is on a network.
- If your SAV path is on a network, check if another user has the project file open and it's their autosave file.
| Command | File\System Configuration\AutoSave | S |
Create a clockwise set joining points.
See also QSET, GCTRACE, TRACEBDY and LOTJOIN.
| Command | Draw\Set\Autoset | S |
Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layers
Use this command to compute volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules.
Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes.
Options
- ALIGN
- Enter the alignment (pline or set object) along which Terramodel will compute volumes. Select the same alignment you used to create the xlines.
- OUTSIDE
- Select the first DTM layer from which you will calculate volumes. This layer should completely encompass the second, or inside, layer and must contain 3D points.
- INSIDE
- Use this layer control to select the second DTM layer. Make sure that, within the limits of the xlines, the points on this layer lie within the extents of the outside layer and have elevations.
- CALC
- Specify the chainage limits of the volumes and whether to send the report to the screen or to an external file.
See also VOLUME to compute cut and fill volumes between surfaces, GRIDVOL, GCGRDVOL and GC20 to compute volumes between surfaces within multiple boundaries.
GCGRDVOL can also report volumes within chainage ranges so it can give a similar report to AVGEND but with more accurate volumes.
EARTHWRK, GCEARTH and XVOLUMES report volumes of roadways.
If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
| 01/09/11 | RG 402 | DTM\Volumes from Xsections | S | 471 |
Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.
Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point.
For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.
| Command | Cogo\Lines\Bearing-bearing intersection | S | 23 |
Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.
Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.
Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.
| Command | Cogo\Lines\Bearing-distance intersection | S | 12 |
Relayer within boundary and bandwidth.
Relayer objects on layer list layers that are within a bandwidth of selected objects.
See also GCOFLINE.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Add a datum angle to bearing text.
Add a specified datum angle to the text value of selected text which includes values in degrees.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 8 |
Create a bench string.
Create a bench string beside an existing set.
There are settings for chainage range, batter slopes, whether to batter to DTM, datum or offsets, side, current layer, interval and corner tidying.
| 01/09/11 |
Draw a curve of best fit through a series of selected points.
Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method.
Best-fit curve options:
- SELECT POINTS
- Select the points through which a curve will be fitted.
- OPTIONS
- Select layers for the points and curves, set the location method and vary the weight of each point in the computations.
- LAYER
-
- Store points on
- Specify the layer on which the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
- Store curve on
- Specify the layer on which the set arc that connects the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
- LOCATION METHOD
-
- Auto select/User select
- Auto automatically calculates the beginning point. User lets you enter a beginning point. When you select User, you can enter a trial location for the centre of the radius and the radius length. Bfitcurv uses the first three points to determine an initial location for the radius point and the radius length, then uses an iterative process to find the solution. If, with the Auto option, Bfitcurv suggests an arc in the opposite direction than desired, try again with the User option. Guessing a radius point and length close to the true answer will speed the calculation process.
- Radius center
- Select a trial position for the calculation of the true radius center.
- Radius length
- Select a trial radius for the calculation of the true radius.
- NUMBER
- Lists the points you selected and through which a curve will be fit. From this box, you can select a point and edit its weight of importance. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
- POINT
- Display the selected point numbers.
- WEIGHT
- Set the weight of importance of each point through which the curve will pass. Bfitcurv will ignore any points having a weight of zero. A high weight will force the arc to go through the point. If fewer than three points are given a high weight of importance, Bfitcurv will not find a valid solution. When three points are given a high weight, an arc is passed through the three points.
- LOCATE
- Show the solution by creating a pline circle with the computed radius point and radius distance. In some situations, it may take several minutes to calculate the solution.
- CREATE
- Create a set arc, PC point, PT point and radius point.
- REPORT
- List the points used to calculate the arc, the weight of importance of each point, their distances from the arc and their coordinates on the arc perpendicular to their position.
- DELETE
- Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.
| 01/09/11 | RG 558 | Cogo\Curves\Best-fit curve | S |
Create a line of best fit through a series of selected points.
Creates a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method.
Best-Fit Line Options
- SELECT POINTS
- Select the points through which a line will be fitted.
- OPTIONS
- Assign independent layers for the new objects, and vary the weight of importance of each point in the computations.
- LAYER
-
- Store points on
- Specify the layer on which points will be stored.
- Store line on
- Specify the layer on which the set line will be stored.
- NUMBER
- Lists the points you selected and through which a line will be fit. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight of importance will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
- POINT
- Display the point numbers of the points whose weight will be edited.
- WEIGHT
- Sets the weight of importance of each point through which the line will pass. A weight of zero will force the line to go through the point. When two points are given a weight of zero, a line is passed through the two points. To ignore a point remove it from the selection. Higher weights pull the line towards the point.
- CREATE
- Create a set line and two points showing the solution.
- REPORT
- list the points used to calculate the line, their weight, their distance to the line and their coordinates on the line perpendicular to their position.
- DELETE
- Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.
| 01/09/11 | RG 567 | Cogo\Lines\Best-fit line | S |
Create an elevation view of points.
Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6.
The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6.
The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View.
The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6.
Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number.
See also FLIPUP.
| 01/09/11 | S |
Create a coloured image from depths.
Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Create a breakline set.
Create a set that is also a breakline.
Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer.
See also SET.
| Command | Draw\Set\Breakline | S | 15 |
Create a pline with right angles.
Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance then OK to enter the first wall segment.
Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command.
See also BUILDING, QSET, TRAVERSE.
| 15/06/05 | Draw\Pline\Building or Cogo\Traverse\Simple building | S | 4 |
Filter excess points from breaklines.
Replace sets on the selected layer with sets made up of straight segments within a filter "tube". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for sets containing straights and increase the vertices for arcs.
The initial filter tube is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the set with width perpendicular to the segment and height measured vertically.
You can limit by multiple boundaries.
BLFILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter tube. Any vertices inside the tube are discarded. The first vertex Terramodel finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.
Filtering is similar to FILTER command, except that BLFILTER also tests for elevation tolerance.
SETFILT and GCFILTER filter by 2D offset tolerance instead.
See also ARCBL which adds points and breaklines points into arcs and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM.
.| 01/09/11 | Modify\More...\Filter breaklines | Geocomp Update or $100 | 127 |
Check for crossing sets on a layer.
Wherever sets on the selected layer cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).
These points give an indication of crossing breaklines.
Some points may be created at set segments which are not breaklines, such as arc segments or sets with points that are 2D, non-contourable or on different layers.
Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.
As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear slower at first then speed up.
Use CROSSCHK to check all selected sets or plines.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Mark\Crossing breaklines | Geocomp Update or $25 | 43 |
Place blocks at points based upon names in the BLOCK.MAP file.
Replaced by AUTODRAFT or GCLABPNT for most purposes.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1217 | Draft\Blocks\Symbols on points | S | 125 |
Reread a block
Replace an internal block with a different external block with the same name.
See also MKBLKINT.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Block\Reread block | S |
Create, place, list or purge blocks.
Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block.
Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names.
The block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited.
You can create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be referenced by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path.
Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks.
Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.
Block Options
- CREATE
- Create a block definition, given a group of objects and the origin of the block. Use the Name button to enter a block name of up to 15 characters, a description, and define it as an internal block or external block with .BLK file extension.
- SETTINGS
- Establish default parameters used when inserting blocks.
These block settings apply to all subsequently created blocks.
- SCALE
- Enter a scale factor for the X, Y, and Z dimensions of all inserted blocks. The factors are measured in relation to the sizes of the original objects. For example, if you want to place a block 2.5 metres in diameter, and the block you are placing is 1 unit in diameter, use a scale factor of 2.5.
- ROTATION
- Establish the amount of clockwise rotation for the X, Y, and Z ordinates of each inserted block, rotated about the insertion point.
- INTERNAL/EXTERNAL radio buttons
- Specify whether all blocks are to be created as internal or external.
- AUTO SCALE
- Apply the current drawing scale of the active view to the block insert. Use this feature when you want to keep the plotted size of the block the same regardless of the current drawing scale. One example would be a north arrow that you always want plotted 4 inches high regardless of the drawing scale.
- AUTO ROTATE
- Cause blocks to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with other symbols to keep them oriented upright on the final plotted sheets.
- CLIP
- Clip the block to the limits of rectangular dynaviews, even if the insertion point falls outside the dynaview. Clipping complex blocks such as hatch patterns can cause the screen redraw speed to decrease.
- MAP COLOUR
- When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer.
This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
- ON
- All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
- OFF
- The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER.
- EDIT
- Edit the attributes of an inserted block.
- LAYER
- Lists the available layers, where you choose one on which to place the block.
- COLOUR
- Modify the colour of the inserted block.
- ATTRIBUTE
- List any attributes that have been attached to the block. Any attributes must be edited using specific commands.
- GROUP
- Modify the integer group number. Set 0 for no group.
- REF. OBJ
- Specify record number of a parent object to which the blocked is referenced.
- OBJ
- This area displays the record number of the block.
- NAME
- Modify the name of the block to match another available block. For example, if you change the name of a block named CIRCLE to TREE1, the circle block will be replaced with a tree canopy block of different size.
- DESCRIPTION
- Displays the description you assigned to the block definition when you created it.
- ORIGIN
- Modify the X and Y of the origin of the block.
- ELEV
- Modify the elevation of the block. See PN below.
- SCALE
- Modify the X, Y or Z scale of the block.
- ROTATION
- Modify the X, Y, and/or Z rotation angles of the block.
- AUTO SCALE
- Apply the current view scale so the block is always the same size on the plot. Auto scale is off by default. Use SCLBLKS to turn Auto scale on.
- MAP COLOUR
-
- ON
- All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
- OFF
- The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
- AUTO ROTATION
- Cause block objects to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with blocks that oriented to the top of final plotted sheets.
- PN
- When a subject point number is specified the block origin is computed relative to the coordinates of the point. When the point is deleted any attached block will also be deleted. EAT text in the block can refer to the subject point.
- INSERT
- Insert a block into a project file.
- Block name
- Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
- LOC
- Locate the origin of the block.
- SCALE
- Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified.
- ROT
- Enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
- MAP COLOUR
- When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer.
This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
- ON
- All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
- OFF
- The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
- INSERT
- Insert the block once you have set the location, etc.
- LIST
- List the internal and external blocks contained in your project file. The list includes the block name, whether it is an internal or external block, the view in which the block was created, the number of lines (polylines or sets) contained in the block definition, the number of text objects contained in the block definition, the number of inserted blocks of that block definition, and the description of the block.
- SAVE
- Save a block definition as an external BLK file.
- NAME
- Select the block definition you want to save to an external file from this drop-down list box of blocks you have created.
- FILE
- Enter up to 8 characters for the name of an external .BLK file.
- SAVE
- Save the block definition as an external block.
- MODIFY
- Select one block from a list of external blocks that have been inserted and modify it to an internal block. See also MKBLKINT.
- MULTIPLE
- Place multiple identical blocks on selected points.
- Name
- Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
- Pts
- Select the points.
- SCALE
- Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified. Also enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
- MULTIPLE
- Insert the blocks on each selected point.
- PURGE
- Delete unused unblock definitions in the project file. Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, DELBLKS, GCEXPLOD, GC09, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, SCLBLKS, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.
| Command | Draw\Block | S | 189 |
Create a chart of blocks.
Create an array of labelled blocks in the sheet view.
The chart shows all blocks listed on separate lines in a text file called BLOCKSPT.LST.
One way to create BLOCKSPT.LST is with Ztree using Ctrl-Batch and %4.The blocks must be internal blocks or external BLK files in the Search Path.
You may wish to make the external blocks internal using MKBLKINT.
A BLOCKSALL.PRO with matching BLOCKPTS.LST are installed in ..\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs folder.
DOCUMENTS includes links to BLOCKSALL.PRO and charts of the blocks in PDF files.
A small block chart could be part of a legend.
See also LINETYPS to create a chart of linetypes.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 148 |
Draw a pline box.
Draw a rectangular pline at specified opposite corners.
See also POLYGON, PLOTBOX and PAD.
If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, we suggest that you adopt the convention of locating the first corner in the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.
| Command | Draw\Pline\Box | S |
Break a pline or set into two parts.
Break a pline or set into two parts at location.
Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.
- Repeat
- Enable this checkbox if you want the command to stay open until Cancel is clicked.
- Set or pline
- Select the set or polyline you wish to break.
- Break
- Enter a location along the line where you want to break it.
A polyline cannot be broken within a spiral or vertical curve.
To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETESEGMENT.
In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.
| Command | Edit\Break | S | 276 |
Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.
Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line.
See also BLDG, QSET and TRAVERSE.
| building.txt | Cogo\Traverse\Complex building | Wencomp | 4 |
Label objects with predefined callout text.
Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features.
Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time.
Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders.
Predefined the callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors.
Callout styles are stored in multiple external .COS libraries in the ..\Terramodel\Locale\English and ...\Terramodel\Geocomp folders in categories. The loaded styles are recorded in tmodwin.ini and therefore independent of the project. The Geocomp Update loads the geocomp01.cos callout style library.
Callout Options
- CALLOUT
- Create or edit a callout style, load and clear the styles contained within an external callout style library (.COS) file, and select the callout style to be used.
- HAL
- If the callout style contains EAT codes for chainage and offset, refer the callout text a horizontal alignment.
- LDR / SUBJ
- If the the callout style contains EAT codes for a subject, refer to that subject. If the callout style includes a leader line, pick the leader line location.
- LOC
- Enter the insertion point of the callout text. Once you have entered the insertion point location, the coordinates will appear in the Loc box. If you pick a location graphically, the text will be placed. If you enter the coordinates in this control, click on the Text control to place the text.
- ROT
- Enter a bearing or an angle of rotation (measured from due north) at which the text is to be placed. Valid rotation angles range from 0° to 360° and can include negative angles. The default rotation is 90° which generates horizontal text.
- PROPS
- Designate a leader line style and a border style and their properties. You can also edit the text object's subject record and its subject HAL record from within this dialog box.
- TEXT
- Place the text once you have typed it and set the other text parameters to your liking.
See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.
| Command | Draw\Text\Callout text... | S | 92 |
Configure plotter carousels.
Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions.
Each carousel defines the colour, in RGB, and width in mm, for "pens" to be used when plotting.
Use PLOTSET, to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTERSET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuraton.
To copy a carousel, manually copy a pen carousel definition (PENDEF) within TMODWIN.INI.
| Command | File\Plot setup\Carousel setup | S | PU3 |
Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.
Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.
Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.
| Macro | Window\Cascade | S and User-definable |
Create a catenary.
Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points.
You can set the weight, tension and horizontal increment.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.
To create a kerb return,
- Select the kerb return horizontal alignment at Culdesac.
- Click Begin info and select the centreline hal of one road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the start of the kerb and the design profile of the that road.
- Click End info and select the centreline hal of the other road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the end of the kerb and the design profile of the other road.
- Click Create to create a profile pline with chainages from the culdesac alignment and four segments containing vertical curves end matching the grades and elevations of the design alignment profiles.
The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.
| 01/09/11 | RG 572 | Cogo\Streets\CdsProf | S |
Recentre views based on chainage.
Tile the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views and centre by chainage from a selected roadjob alignment.
Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe.
For any selected roadjob, nominate a chainage by selecting a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the selected chainage. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.
If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used, if set.
The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range.
There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage then making it active.
On starting this option, the views are horizontally tiled.
| 01/09/11 | Windows\Tile centred by chainage | Geocomp Update or $500 |
Compute superelevation from existing crossfall.
For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are placed in the Super view on the current layer so you can design to match existing superelevation.
Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Set the start chainage (or beginning station) of a HAL.
If you selected US English during Terramodel installation, the command dialog and Settings menu will refer to Station. If British English, Chainage.
Using ALIAS, STATION may be executed from the command line by CHAINAGE, STARTCHAINAGE and so on.
Sets and plines are always chained from the first point created to the last point created. Chainage equations can be assigned by using HALMANAGER.
See also ACTIVECHAINAGE, SETSTA, REVERSE and GC74.
| Command | Edit\Chainage or Edit\Station | S | 84 |
Check and correct roadway alignment registration.
See also GCSUBGDE and GCDTMGDE.
| 14/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.
For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer.
The displayed colour will not appear to change until you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings.
For example, select all objects by view to change to from a colour by layer convention to a colour by object convention. To change all from colour by object to colour by layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Change elevation by point name
Change the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name.
All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:
| point name | new elevation |
| 123.456 | 123.456 |
| R.L.=123.456 | 123.456 |
| 123.456 I.L. | 123456.00 |
| 90301 | 90301.00 |
| TOP01 | 1.00 |
| RCP dia. 225 class Y1 | 0.2251 |
| give way sign | * |
| * |
You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.
Replace characters in names of selected records within a range according to a selected dictionary.
Create a dictionary file using a text editor, following this example:
#Dictionary file format # Lines with first char as # are ignored # use ' character as limiter #'Current Text','New Text' # #'English','Espanol' 'Feasibility Study','Estudio de factibilidad' 'Road design','D seño decarretera' 'North','Norte' 'Cross-Section','Corte' # #'English','Francais' 'CHAINAGE','PK' 'CH','PK' 'SCALES','ECHELLE' 'SCALE','ECHELLE' 'Scale','Echelle' 'LONGITUDINAL SECTION','Profil en Long' 'CROSS SECTIONS','Profil en Travers' 'OFFSET','Distance du centre'
Note that the changes are processed in dictionary file order, so be careful. If, in the example, 'CH' replaced was before 'CHAINAGE', you would get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.
The name of a text object has the same value as the text, so use CHNGTEXT to change multiple text objects. Do not select text objects, if you do not want to change the text.
See also SNR (Search and Replace), and CHTXT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | RDES |
Replace selected text based on a dictionary.
Replace characters in selected text records according to a selected dictionary.
Create a dictionary file using a text editor, following this example:
#Dictionary file format # Lines with first char as # are ignored # use ' character as limiter #'Current Text','New Text' # #'English','Espanol' 'Feasibility Study','Estudio de factibilidad' 'Road design','D seño decarretera' 'North','Norte' 'Cross-Section','Corte' # #'English','Francais' 'CHAINAGE','PK' 'CH','PK' 'SCALES','ECHELLE' 'SCALE','ECHELLE' 'Scale','Echelle' 'LONGITUDINAL SECTION','Profil en Long' 'CROSS SECTIONS','Profil en Travers' 'OFFSET','Distance du centre'
Note that the changes are processed in dictionary file order, so be careful. If, in the example, 'CH' replaced was before 'CHAINAGE', you would get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.
If the new text is a different length, you can match the text width attributes to suit.
You can also refer to characters by their three-digit decimal ASCII value. For example, \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. In fonts such as symbol.fnt, you can specify a symbol by this method.
See also SNR (Search and Replace), CHNGNAME and CHTXT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 514 |
Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM.
Report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name in a table, given a HAL, a Design DTM, and some points.
If CSV, is selected, the report includes commas, so you can then save the report as a text file to CSV. No separate CSV file is created.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Convert stationing text to chainage text.
Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK/AUST chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create a circular pline.
Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.
| Command | Draw\Pline\Circle | S | 29 |
Remove unnecessary points from sets.
Delete each point in selected sets with the same point number as the previous point. This also removes zero length arcs.
Consecutive points can be created accidentally or exist in imported data. They may can cause some commands to behave in unexpected ways.
See also DUPLTRIS.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 30 |
Clear text from the the message scroll window.
See also MESSAGESCROLL.
| Command | Windows\Clear message scroll | S | 146 |
Clip plines and sets to boundaries.
Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries.
The objects can be clipped to remove that part Inside or Outside the boundaries, or to Break at the boundary.
The boundaries can be closed plines or outside text objects. The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extent of the text scaled by the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET.
To clip a pline or set to boundaries, see TRIM or to a length, see GC88. To clip hatching, EXPLODE to plines first. To clip DTMs, see GCCLIP. To clip and merge DTMs, see DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT or GCMERGE. To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead areas, see SETSMOOTH. To clip Xlines, see GCXLINES. To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS. To clip an image, see IMAGE. To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.
| Command | Edit\Clip | S | 254 |
Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.
Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.
| Command | File\Close project | S | 255 |
Close selected sets and plines.
For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start.
Optionally, use name masks from a file.
| 29/10/08 | Edit\Close lines | S | 126 |
Modify the color of selected objects.
Change the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255.
Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer.
Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block.
Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLOR. To use COLOR with the British English installation, alias COLOR to the command COLOUR.
| Command | Modify\Color | S | 40 |
Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.
Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels.
Select points from those on a selected DTM layer.
The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges.
Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location.
If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line.
The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing.
Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLORCODE. To use COLORCODE with the British English installation, alias COLORCODE to the command COLOURCODE.
| Command | Tunnel Training Guide | Tunnels\Modify Colour codes | S | 342 |
Change the colour of plines by contour interval.
Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation.
Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.
Examples:
- Bands of colour
- To colour isopachs at 0.1m intervals in 1.0m bands,
- CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.1 and Index interval to 1.
- CONTOUR the isopach surface.
- CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0.
- COLORCON with number of colours large enough so the colours don't start repeating.
- Modify COLOUR by colour as required.
- Reduce the number of contours
- To remove every second contour pline supplied at an interval of 0.25,
- CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25.
- COLORCON with number of colours = 2.
- DELETE the contour plines with elevations ending in .25 or .75 by colour.
- Ribbon effect
- With the contour interval set to 1 and the number of colours set to 10, contours with an elevation ending in 1 will be coloured 1, those ending in 2 will be coloured 2, and so on. Contours with an elevation ending in zero (0) will have colour 15 as the colour, since zero is reserved to designate colour by layer.
- Change Index contour
- To change the index contour of supplied contour plines from 0.25 to 1.0.
- CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25.
- COLORCON with number of colours = 4.
- RELAYER the 1.0 interval contour plines by colour.
- COLOUR the contours by layer.
The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET.
If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update.
COLOURCON is aliased to COLORCON. See also COLORPT.
| 31/08/11 | Modify\Colour code contours | Geocomp Update or $50 | 156 |
Change the colour of points by contour interval.
Increment the colour number of selected points based on elevation.
Change the colour of points, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.
The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET.
See also COLORCON and COLORCODE
| 29/10/08 | Tunnel Training Guide | S | 156 |
Modify the colour of selected objects.
Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255.
Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer.
Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block.
Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOUR. To use COLOUR with the US English installation, alias COLOUR to the command COLOR.
| Command | Modify\Colour | S | 40 |
Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.
Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels.
Select points from those on a selected DTM layer.
The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges.
Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location.
If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line.
The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing.
Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOURCODE. To use COLOURCODE with the US English installation, alias COLOURCODE to the command COLORCODE.
| Command | Tunnel Training Guide | Tunnels\Modify Colour codes | S | 342 |
Modify the colour and linetype of selected objects by layer.
Modify the colour and linetype of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is
layer,colour,linetype
See geocomp.lcl for an example.
COLORLINE and COLOURLINE are aliased to COLRLINE. See also GC16 and GC16ADC.
| Command | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Command line.
Open a new command line.
Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active.
To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C.
If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command.
If the command line has disappeared, see CommandToggle.
| Command | File\Command line | S |
Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.
Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu.
The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command.
CommandToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.
| Macro | Window\Command line | S and User-definable |
Place a hydrographic compass rose.
Place hydrographic compass rose blocks with optional magnetic deviation and date of survey.
Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 616 |
Connect two lines of the same type, forming a single line.
Similar to JOIN, except that if the lines do not have to have coincidental end points a connecting line segment is added.
The resulting line will retain the record number of the first line selected, and all of its properties and attributes. Any objects that previously referenced either the first or second line will thereafter reference the resulting line.
In selecting the lines you can pick anywhere on the line. However, you must pick nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.
| 29/10/08 | RG 149 | Edit\Connect | S | 15 |
Extract pline contours from a DTM.
Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals.
The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOURSET.
| Command | DTM\Contour | S | 289 |
Create plines at a specified contour elevation.
Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer.
The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOURSET.
| Command | DTM\Generate contours at elev | S | DTM 4 |
Configure contour settings.
Set the contour values uses by commands such as CONTOUR, LINKSET, COLORPT and COLORCON.
- Normal interval
- Contour elevation increment
- Index interval
- The number of normal intervals per index contour
- Label nth contour
- The number of normal intervals per labelled contour which is usually the same as the index interval
- Splining
- B-Splines pass inside the contour control points (IPs) and Overhauser curves pass through the control points.
- Layer Assignment
- If the contour and index contours layer names include *, the * is substituted by the DTM layer name.
- Exponential
- Create contours of exponential surfaces such as bacterial concentration or corrosivity.
- Depression contours
- Create the lowest contour line using "Depression" linetype.
See also CONTOURATELEV.
| Command | Settings\Contour settings | S | 43 |
Compute volumes from contour plines.
Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines.
The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume.
This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes.
You can use the ContourVol command in two different modes:
- Line
- Select a series of closed contour plines representing a mound or depression. Click the Volume button to display the accumulated volume in the message scroll area. If you wish to display a more detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer, click the Report button.
- Digitizer
- Digitize closed contours representing a mound or depression.
- Input the elevation of the first contour using the Elev elevation control.
- Digitize a series of points for the first contour using the Loc point control. You must provide a minimum of three points for each contour.
- If you select points by typing coordinates in the Loc point control, click the Pt. button to enter the point and proceed to the next point.
- When you are done digitising points, click the End button to close the contour.
- Repeat for successive contours until you have defined the mound or depression.
- Click the Report button to display a detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer.
The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.
| Command | DTM\Volumes from contours | S | DTM V |
Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.
Any combination of sets and plines can be converted to a single type of object. New lines are assigned the colour and linetype of the original line and placed on the layer of the original. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained. You have the choice of keeping or deleting the original objects.
Convert Options
- Lines
- This select control is used to select the lines to be converted
- To (Set or Pline)
- These radio buttons are used to select the type of lines to be created
- Del old
- This check box is used to optionally delete the original lines
- Dup pts ok
- This check box lets Terramodel create points for new sets that have duplicate northings and eastings (point numbers cannot be duplicated)
- Lay
- This check box lets you set up the default behaviour for placing the new entity on a layer. When this box is checked, Terramodel places new entities on the current layer. When this check box is not checked, Terramodel places new entities on the same layers as the original objects.
Tips on using Convert
- GCCONVRT
- GCCONVRT is usually preferred to CONVERT because GCCONVRT retains all the attributes such as Name and Layer and is much faster.
- Dup pts ok
- CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, especially if "Dup pts ok" is OFF.
- Duplicate point removal
- Use DTM formation or GC31 instead of CONVERT to remove duplicate points.
- Elevation
- When converting a set to a pline, the elevation of the new pline is derived from the first point in the set.
- Spirals
- Terramodel uses sets and plines for specific purposes. For example, sets cannot include spirals and plines do not link points and cannot be labelled with lot numbers. See the Terramodel User Guide for more information about object types.
- Visibility
- When converting sets to plines, hidden segments are omitted so the plines are split. To temporarily display all hidden set segments use DISPLAYSET Ignore hide. To hide or reveal hidden set segments use HIDE. To permanently reveal all hidden set segments of selected sets, use UNHIDE.
- Arcs
- When converting a pline to a set line, a new point object is created for the radius point and at each PC and PT. If multiple arcs use the same arc points, duplicate points will be created at each arc point.
- Design
- When creating a design, it is best to begin with construction lines that can easily be changed to accommodate changes in design concept. Plines are excellent construction lines because they are very basic, two-dimensional objects having a large amount of flexibility in their use. After the initial concept has been stored and modified, you can convert the plines into set lines, then assign elevations to the endpoints. You then have a design with intelligence whose surface can be modelled and from which volumes can be calculated.
| Command | Edit\Convert | S | 292 |
Set slope convention.
Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice.
Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4).
These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.
| Command | Settings\Convention settings | S |
Coordinate transformation of points.
Use either seven-parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method.
The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.
See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems.
COORDCON may be aliased to GCCOORD which transforms not just points, but sets, plines and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems.
GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using COORDCON settings.
GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas COORDCON transforms points in Terramodel projects.
Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the \Shared\Mentor.dir.
COORDCON requires COGO module.
If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601).
CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices only.
| 29/10/08 | UG 425 | Cogo\Utilities\Coordinate conversion | S | GeoCalc |
Toggle and configure the Coordinate Scroll display dialog.
Coordinate Scroll tracks the cursor. The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.).
Coordinate Scroll Options
- COORDINATES
- When the cursor is in the plan view mode it displays its Northing and Easting. In the profile view it displays the station and elevation. In the cross section view it displays offset and elevation, and in the sheet view, X and Y.
- GPS COORDINATES
- Reserved for future use.
- 3-D DIGITIZER Used when the digitizer responds with X, Y and Z values.
- DELTA COORDINATES
- Shows the change in coordinate values from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor in the current view mode units.
- BEARING-DISTANCE
- Shows the bearing and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the plan view mode. In the profile or cross section views it shows the grade and distance.
- CHAINAGE( or STATION)-OFFSET
- With a rubber band cursor and an active chainage control, the chainage and offset relative to a selected alignment is shown in the plan view mode. When the cursor is rubber banding in the plan view, a single line showing the chainage will be shown in profile view and the offset in the cross section view. When rubber banding in the profile view mode the chainage and the difference in elevation from the selected alignment to the cursor is shown.
- LAYER-ELEVATION
- Shows the current DTM layer and the elevation on the DTM at the cursor location. Set the current DTM layer first using DTMCH, SPOTSPOT or some other command that requires a DTM.
- SLOPE-ASPECT
- Shows the slope of the TIN on the current DTM layer at the cursor location and the direction of the surface slope. This option must be used in conjunction with the above layer-elevation option, to establish the current DTM layer.
- VISIBLE
- Controls the visibility of the coordinate scroll.
- SAVE
- Saves the current settings to the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.
- DONE
- Keeps the current settings for the current session without updating the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.
Coordinate Scroll tips:
- Use the title bar to drag the scroll to a new location.
- Minimize the scroll to an icon by clicking its minimize button.
- Maximize the scroll by double-clicking the minimized Coordinates icon.
Coordinate Scroll TMODWIN.INI settings:
- Under [CoordScroll], CoordNdec=x controls number of decimals for CoordScroll display and digitizer precision of a graphically entered point.
If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display, but it is possible to lose the scroll of the edge of the display. If you lose the scroll, check that you have turned it on. If you can't find it, type RECOVERSCROLL.
See also GC75, IDSTATION and GCDTMDIF.
| Command | Window\Coordinate scroll | S | SDS |
Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.
Duplicate selected objects.
- 3d
- If ticked, you can specify the From and To coordinates as X,Y,Z, rather than X,Y.
- Lay
- If ticked, copy the objects to the current layer, otherwise they remain on the original layers.
- From
- Specify the location from which the vector is to computed
- From
- Specify the location to which the vector is to computed
Tips
- The coordinate order is controlled by VIEWSET.
- To duplicate objects in a new location, when you know the coordinate shift, enter 0,0 (or 0,0,0 if 3D), in "From" and the relative dX,dY(,dZ) in "To".
- To assign starting point numbers for new points, use the "Start Pn" setting of POINTSET.
- The COPY command can modify properties of the duplicate objects including colours, names and contourability, unlike GCCOPY.
- To copy objects to another layer, such as a DTM layer, without changing their location, use GCCOPY instead.
- To make multiple copies, use MULTICOPY.
| Command | Edit\Copy | S | 178 |
Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.
Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases.
This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to reenter all the values or lose the old design.
The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, superelevations, design settings or mass haul information.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 | 415 |
Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.
Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob.
This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want.
The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or superelevations.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Copy roadjob | Geocomp Update or $200 | 415 |
Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.
Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template.
This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More\Copy template | Geocomp Update or $200 | 413 |
Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.
If you cannot find the coordinate scroll dialog, even though you have used COORDS to confirm that it is turned on, you may have moved the dialog off the windows display. Type CORDSCRL, or RECOVERSCROLL (an alias for CORDSCRL) to recover the scroll.
The coordinate scroll should then appear next time you start Terramodel located approximately 600 pixels down and across from the top left corner of the Terramodel display. You can then move the scroll to where you prefer.
If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | SDS |
Count the number of objects of each type in each view.
An alias to OLIST.
See also LAYINFO, DTMINFO, OLIST2 and LIST.
| Alias | Reports\Count objects | user definable | SDS |
Create a coordinate table of points.
- Points
- Select the points to be tabulated. The values in the table update as the points are moved.
- Origin
- Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table
- Title
- Enter up to 61 characters for the title of the table in this edit text control. If you checked the Use Title Box check box, Terramodel will include the title at the top of the coordinate table.
- Field Number
- This column displays the order in which Terramodel will include the point parameters in the table. The first column of the table is field number 1, the second column field number 2, and so on.
- Width
- Enter the width, in number of characters, for the column of the table entry highlighted in the list box. There is no maximum width for columns. If any entries exceed the width you specify here, Terramodel will warn you.
- Heading
- Enter the heading that Terramodel will place at the top of the column for the table entry highlighted in the list box. The number of characters you can include in a heading depends on the width of the column for that table entry.
- Prefix
- Enter up to 13 characters for a prefix that Terramodel will include with each listing for the table entry highlighted in the list box.
- Value
- Select the value type for the table entry highlighted in the list box from this list box of point value types. Select from Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value), Elev (elevation), Desc (point name), or None if you do not want to include a value for the column.
- General Properties
- This section lets you configure the general format of the table.
- Lines/Page
- Enter the number of lines of data for each page of the table in this integer control. Terramodel creates additional table pages for entries that cannot fit on a single table page, placing them at the same y-coordinate position and one inch apart to the right of the first page.
- Layer
- Select the layer on which the table will be stored from this layer control.
- Text style
- Select the text style in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this style control.
- Colour
- Select the colour in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this colour control. The table frame is drawn in the colour of the layer on which the table is drawn.
The points are now sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order.
See also LLTABLE and LABELTABLE.
| 15/09/09 | RG 1226 | Draft/Label coord. tables | S | 188, 92 |
Import layers and layer lists from a file.
Import lists of layers in layer lists.
The format of the input file is layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype. Only the layer list and layer name are required.
You have the option to create new layers where named layers do not already exist. Colours and linetypes are only applied to new layers.
Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly.
Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Check for crossing sets or plines.
Wherever selected sets or plines cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).
Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.
You could, for example, use CROSSCHK look for crossing lines in a window on an isolated layer.
Use BLINECHK to check sets on a selected layer.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Mark\Crossing lines | Geocomp Update or $25 | 43 |
Toggle on/off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.
Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment.
If the label is a user-mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1223 | Draft\Crowfoot toggle | S |
Coordinate System Manager.
Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices.
Coordinate System Manager manages the current.csd database in C:\Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData\ or C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData\.
You can also open Coordinate System Manager through directly through Windows Start... Programs.. Trimble Office... Utilities... Coordinate System Manager.
Coordinate System Manager is supplied with a number of Trimble surveying and mapping systems. It lets Trimble surveying instrument users:
- Browse
- Know what parameters you are using as you work
- Change
- You cannot edit the definitions that are supplied, you can duplicate records then edit the duplicated record
- Create
- Establish a site if you are working in an area that is not adequately covered by the definitions provided
Use Coordinate System Manager to:
- Create or edit a site, zone, datum, ellipsoid, or geoid
- Select the projection used by a zone
- Select the ellipsoid of any datum
- Specify vertical and horizontal adjustments to a zone and save them as a named site
- Select a geoid model
- Assign the files to be used by a geoid model or datum transformation
To add a new Geoid Grid File to Coordinate System Manager using AusGeoid09 as an example
- Open C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs\Ausgeoid09 ggf files.zip
- Choose the ggf file for just South East Australia or the whole of Australia
- Extract Ausgeo09.ggf into C:\Users\All Users\Trimble\GeoData\
- Run CSMAN
- Create a new geoid record using Ausgeo09.ggf
- Save the Coordinate System Database file to TEMP.CSD
- Exit Coordinate Systems Manager
- Rename "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoDB\template.cst" to "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoDB\template-old.cst"
- Copy TEMP.CSD to "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoDB"
- Rename "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoDB\TEMP.CSD" to "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoDB\template.cst"
CSMAN executes C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\Geodb\Geodbnt.exe in 64 bit Windows. Use or rename the alias CSMAN2000, CSMAN32, CSMAN95, CSMAN98, CSMANME, CSMANNT or CSMANXP if required.
See also GEOSYS.
COORDCON and GCCOORD are completely separate from the Coordinate System Manager.
| Alias | In-built help | S |
Create custom construction staking reports.
You can create roadway staking format files which allow you to control the format and content of roadway staking reports.
Open the Construction Staking command bar.
| 29/10/08 | RG 992 | Road\Reports\Staking\Construction | S | 41 |
Create a cul-de-sac at the end of a pline or set.
- SELECT ALIGNMENT
- Select the horizontal alignment at the end of which a cul-de-sac will be created on the same layer as the HAL.
- CULDESAC TYPE
- Select one of four cul-de-sac types:
- Knuckle
- For widening on the outside of a bend
- Typical
- Comprising three circular arcs
- Teardrop
- Including a central traffic island
- Hammerhead
- With a square end
- PROPERTIES
- Define the properties for selected type of cul-de-sac.
- CREATE
- Create points and sets on the current layer using the selected alignment, cul-de-sac type and defined properties.
See Terramodel help for diagrams illustrating the four cul-de-sac types.
| 29/10/08 | RG 574 | Cogo\Streets\Cul-de-sac | S |
Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement
-
Cursor options
- None
- No restriction on cursor direction
- Ortho
- Draw the cursor along an orthogonal line from the last point drawn, based on the azimuth in the Snap Settings
- Perpendicular
- Draw the cursor along a line perpendicular to the last line segment drawn
You can also change the Snap Settings using SNAPSET.
| Command | Settings\Cursor | S |
Insert or edit a pline curve.
Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or overhauser curve into a pline.
Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp.
After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.
-
The curve types are:
- Arc
- A circular curve defined by Arc length, Chord length, DC (Degree of curvature), External distance, Middle ordinate, Radius, or Tangent.
- Spiral
- A circular curve defined by radius or DC (Degree of Curvature) with two clothoid transition spirals defined by the Back (In) and Ahead (Out) spiral lengths.
- Vertical
- A parabolic curve in a profile view defined by Length, K factor, Crest, Sight distance or through a point. When the sight distance option is used, the eye and object heights are taken from the DESIGNSET.
- Combining
- A curve combining two arcs and three spirals. Specify the three spiral lengths, two different arc radii the proportion of the first arc. The proportion can be defined by the % delta angle, but it usually easier to enter the first arc length as a negative value.
- Overhauser
- A spline curve where the the curve passes through the vertex.
- Decurve
- Remove a curve
You can also enter curves while entering alignments using the PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.
| Command | Draw\Arc\Pline curve or Draw\Pline\Curve or Edit\More...\Curve in pline | S | 84 |
Compute curves from arc properties.
Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.
-
CURVESOL dialog box
- Radius, Chord, Arc length, Delta, Mid-Ord, External, Tangent, Deg of curvature
- Select and enter the value of any two arc properties
- Segment area
- List the segment area of the computed arc
- Sector area
- List the sector area of the computed arc
- Curve definition chord length
- Calculate degree of curvature solutions based on the arc definition or chord definition of a curve. For the chord definition, also enter the chord length value in the real number control to the right.
- Calculate
- Once two arc properties have been entered, click Calculate to compute the remaining values.
- Report
- Report the arc properties in a P3pad report.
Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.
| Restricted arc property combinations | |
| Arc length, chord | Arc length must be greater than the chord distance |
| Arc length, tangent | Arc length must be less than 2 times the tangent length |
| Chord, middle ordinate | Chord distance must be greater than 2 times the middle ordinate |
| Chord, radius | Chord distance must be less than 2 times the radius |
| Chord, tangent | Chord distance must be less than 2 times the tangent |
| Delta, arc length | Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees |
| Delta, radius | Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees |
| Delta, chord (or external, middle ordinate, or tangent) | Delta must be less than 180 degrees |
| External, middle ordinate | The external distance must be greater than the middle ordinate |
| Middle ordinate, radius | The middle ordinate must be less than the radius. |
See also CURVE, SCURVE and FILLET.
| Command | Cogo\Utilities\Curve solutions... | S | 84 |
Balance cut and fill volumes (metric).
Raise or lower the design DTM automatically until the desired net volume to an existing DTM is reached.
Compute batters according to the design slopes of the DTM edge sets. If there are no sets on the design layer, plines on that layer can be converted to sets.
Optionally, use Shrink/Swell factors.
Distances are in metres and volumes are in cubic metres.
See also CUTFILLA, PADSHIFT and MOVEPAD.
| 01/09/11 | Cutfill video demo | DTM\More... | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Balance cut and fill volumes (feet).
Raise or lower the design DTM automatically until the desired net volume to an existing DTM is reached.
Batters according to the design slopes of the DTM edge sets.
Optionally, use Shrink/Swell factors.
Distances are in feet and volumes are in cubic yards.
See also CUTFILL, PADSHIFT and MOVEPAD.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Export data to Civilcad ASCII5 5 (AS5).
Export point, sets and text to Civilcad AS5 file format.
Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. export\Civilcad 5 AS5 | Geocomp Update or $75 |
Import data from Civilcad AS5 file.
Import data in Civilcad ASCII 5 (.AS5) file format.
Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4.
The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant.
Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.
As5 files can contain zero length arcs. This can result in extra circles if exported to DXF or DWG. If this happens, use CLEANSET to remove the zero length arcs.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. import\Civilcad 5 AS5 | Geocomp Update or $75 |
Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.
Export pints, sets and text to Civilcad ASC file format.
Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. export\Civilcad 4 ASC | Geocomp Update or $75 | FC C |
Import data from Civilcad Version 4 ASC.
Import data in Civilcad ASC file format.
Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6.
Include points, strings and text.
Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names.
Non-contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggles this attribute.
Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. import\Civilcad 4 ASC | Geocomp Update or $75 | FC C |
DC File Editor
View or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files.
You can also run the DC File Editor directly from Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor.
If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.
| Alias | Cogo\Utilities\Trimble DC file editor | S |
Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.
Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.
DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.
-
Distance-Distance Options
- 1st pt/arc
- Select either a point or an arc.
- Dist
- If you select a point, enter a distance from the point in the distance control to the right. If you select an arc, enter a distance from the arc centre. The default distance is the radius.
- OK
- Click OK to display a ghosted circle to indicate the location of the first arc. Now enter a 2nd point or arc and a distance then pick a location with the mouse to indicate one of the two arc intersection solutions.
| Command | Cogo\Lines\Distance-distance intersection | S | 11 |
Determine the angle between two bearings.
The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.
| 29/10/08 | ADD 9.3 154 | S | 91 |
Delete missing external blocks.
Delete all external blocks from the project where the external .BLK file is missing.
"Unable to find block" messages are often due to importing a DWG or DXF file containing links to missing external blocks.
If you still have "unable to find block" messages after running DELBLK, you probably have blocks that contain other blocks that are missing. You will need to EXPLODE these blocks then run DELBLKS again.
See also BLOCK List and BLOCK Purge.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Block\Delete missing | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Delete selected objects from a project.
Delete selected objects from a project.
You can prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET.
Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes.
If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set.
See also DeleteSegment.
| Command | Edit\Delete | S | 31 |
Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.
Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments.
See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to make set segments invisible and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments.
In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.
| Command | Edit\Delete line segment | S | 31 |
Change numeric names to alphanumeric descriptors.
Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.pco)
See also CHNGNAME, IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.
| 29/10/08 | S | 76 |
Change numeric names (point descriptors) to alphanumeric descriptors using a multi-code separator and global code identifier.
Uses a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.pco)
See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 76 |
Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.
Before using the Design command, make sure the entire design DTM layer is enclosed with one or more contiguous sets (such as a created by DTMEDGE).
Check or configure the slope attributes of each surrounding set with the Slopes option of EDIT.
The grade is applied in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable.
Whenever the Design command encounters an arc on the outside edge of the design DTM, it uses the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET to break the curve into straight line segments. Points are created at these segments (along the curve) and are then projected to intersect with original ground. Set lines are created to connect the design curve points and the ground intersection points.
Ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets that Terramodel creates are assigned the name of the design layer as their name. You can easily erase these points by selecting them by name. (Name selection is case sensitive.)
See also DESIGNSET, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE.
| Command | DTM\Design | S |
Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.
Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job.
Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.
| Command | Roads\On design\Design elev | S |
Configure design settings
Configure the default batter slopes and smoothness assigned to new sets and vertical sight distance calculation parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.
- Tie-in slopes
-
- Cut slope/Fill slope
- These vertical controls let you enter values for cut and fill slopes that will be assigned to newly created sets. The tie-in slopes are used by DESIGN to project the design DTM onto the existing ground DTM. Any change to these values will change the slope of all sets, except sets where the slopes have been fixed by EDIT.
- Default set smoothness
-
These options let you establish the set smoothness that is applied to sets as they are created. Use Soft for the default unless you gave a good reason to change it temporarily. Smoothness can affects contour, cross section and profile plines, and surfaces in TVLITE. Use SETSMOOTH or to change the smoothness of selected sets.
- Soft
- Contours illustrate relatively smooth transitions, such as in natural features. When the contour line passes through the set line a single vertex is created before the line is smoothed.
- Hard
- Contours bend more sharply around breaklines. When the contour line passes through the set line, two vertices are created before the line is smoothed.
- Sharp
- Contours depict abrupt changes in a pline where it crosses a breakline. This smoothness is used for such features as curbs and gutters or edges of concrete pads. When the contour line passes through the breakline, three vertices are created before the line is smoothed. If all breaklines are Sharp, TVLITE can be very slow.
- Dead
- Contours will not be drawn inside of a closed set boundary line. This smoothness is used where contours inside of building footprints and ponds would be undesirable. The DTM still extends through the dead area but the contour lines are removed from inside the area. Cross section and profile plines are also suppressed in dead areas. Use dead smoothness for specific sets, not the default, otherwise contours will be completely suppressed inside DTMEDGE sets.
- Vertical Curve Design Controls
- Set the eye, object, and headlight distances that Terramodel will use when calculating the sight distances used for computing vertical curves based on AASHTO standards.
- Eye Height
- The distance from the road to the standard eye height of a driver.
- Object Height, Stopping:
- The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe stopping distance.
- Object Height, Passing:
- The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe passing distance.
- Headlight Height:
- The distance from the road to the centre of the standard headlight beam.
- Divergence Angle:
- The angle of the standard headlight beam divergence.
| Command | Settings\Design settings | S |
Remove spikes from a DTM.
Based on maximum grade and a boundary.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | GCGeocode |
Data Format Editor
Edit logger (.lgr) files which contain the detailed data format used by the IMPORT and EXPORT script managers to interpret the data.
This editor uses DataFormatEditor.dll. If you have 32-bit Windows, type DFEDIT32 instead.
| Alias | User definable | Coordf |
Trimble diagnostic report
Report details of the computer relevant to Trimble applications including system architecture, Windows registry, Trimble applications and files.
If TrimRptU.exe does not run, install Trimble Data Transfer Utility and try again.
If you have 32-bit Windows, use or rename alias DIAG32.
| Alias | Cogo\Utilities\Trimble diagnostic report | trimble.com |
Label dimension between two points or a segment of set or pline.
You can dimension between two points or along a segment with text placed at a location.
Click Props to configure the labelling units, decimal places, and layer on which the labels will be placed.
-
General properties
- DISTANCE TYPE (LINEAR/HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL)
- Dimension the whole distance (Linear), or just the Horizontal or Vertical distance. In the plan view, Horizontal will dimension the change in the Easting coordinates, and Vertical will dimension the change in Northing coordinates between points or of the segment.
- LAYER
- Selects the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. If you select layer 0 (zero), Terramodel will use the current layer.
- DIMENSION BLOCKS
- Check this to store each dimension as a block. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, Terramodel discards the block definition when the project is saved.
- FORCE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE
- Check this box so that the arrows on the dimension lines point inward, when the text is placed outside of the extension lines. When this box is not checked, dimension line arrows point in the same direction when the dimension text is placed outside the extension lines. This option is not implemented when you locate the dimension labels within the extension lines.
- FORMAT (ENGINEERING/ARCHITECTURAL)
- The Engineering format uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by MEASUNIT. The Architectural format labels the text in feet, inches and fractional inches.
- UNITS SUFFIX
- Append this suffix to the end of the units labels. The number of characters you can enter in this control is dependent upon the font you are using.
- SUB-UNITS SUFFIX
- Append this suffix to the sub units (sheet units) portion of the label. Terramodel only uses sub units when dimensioning in the Architectural format. The number of characters is dependent upon the font.
- NUMBER OF DECIMALS
- Denote the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
- Units Scale
- Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
- FRACTIONAL INCREMENT
- Select the precision of the Architectural format dimensions.
-
Text Properties
- TEXT STYLE
- Select the text style for font, height, aspect, and slant of the dimension text. The justification of the dimension text will always be Center-Middle, and the orientation will always be Legible.
- TEXT COLOUR
- Specify the colour for the dimension text.
- DISTANCE FROM TEXT TO LINE
- Enter a factor for the text height to determine the distance the text is placed away from the dimension line. If the dimension text is located to either side of the dimension line, this determines the distance from the dimension line to the beginning or the end of the text.
- DRAW TEXT ABOVE DIM LINE
- Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.
-
Line Properties
- DRAW DIMENSION LINE
- Enable dimension lines.
- LINETYPE
- Select the line type to be applied to the dimension line (usually a LEADER LINE).
- COLOUR
- Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
- DRAW EXTENSION LINE 1
- The Segment option creates and orders each pair of extension lines (dimension lines located outside of the dimension limits) based on the direction of the segment. Checking this box causes Terramodel to create the first extension line.
- LINE TYPE
- Select the line type to be applied to the first extension line.
- DRAW EXTENSION LINE 2
- Create the second extension line.
- LINE TYPE
- select the line type for the second extension line.
- COLOUR
- Specify the colour for both extension lines.
- LENGTH OF OUTSIDE LINES
- Define the length of the outside dimension line in sheet units. This option is enabled only if you check Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
- EXTENSION LINE GAP
- Defines the offset (in sheet units) from the limits of the distance you are dimensioning to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension line begins within this gap area, the extension line at that location will be twice the gap value plus the height of the text, centred on the location.
When the dimension is created in a view with a vertical exaggeration, the dimension text will appear distorted if the view exaggeration changes.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1228 | Draft\Dimensioning | S | 91 |
Break sets and plines into segments.
This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes.
DISJOIN does not break plines containing curves.
DISJOIN is an alias of GCUNJOIN.
See also JOIN.
| alias | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Display feature attributes.
Label selected records with any attributes defined by features.adf.
Specify a layer and text style to label the records with EAT text or Report the attributes without creating the labels.
Requires the general-purpose attribute definition file FEATURES.ADF.
| 11/02/13 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Control how objects are displayed.
Allows some objects to be partially displayed for quicker display redraw times.
Controls the number of pixels used to display points.
The view resolution segments per arc, spline, spiral and vertical curve controls not only the resolution on the display but also profile extraction from a DTM and similar functions.
For any curve, the maximum number of segments for all the components of a curve together is 100 otherwise the curve will not display correctly. For example, if arcs have 20 segments and spirals have 10, the total for Arc curves would be 10+20+10=40, and the total for Combining curves would be 10+20+10+20+10=70.
PLOTSET maintains an independent plotting resolution that enables you to plot curves to the plotter more smoothly than is generally required for display.
- View Resolution Segments per
- All curves are displayed as a series of short straight line segments, but maintain their full mathematical properties for computations. The greater the number of line segments the smoother the curve will appear, however the time it takes to draw the curves and the amount of memory required increases with the number of segments. All curves are saved with a view resolution of zero to minimize file size. The view resolution settings are also used when translating objects to other file formats.
- Segments per Arc
- Set the number of segments per circular curve. The 10 or above will make most arcs appear smooth unless the radius is large.
- Segments per Spline
- Sets the number of segments per splined pline. Splined lines are used primarily for contour lines. The recommended setting for most applications is 3. A setting of 0 displays the line as unsplined. A setting of 1 is invalid and will be drawn as a setting of 2. The maximum setting is 100.
- Segments per Vertical Curve
- Sets the number of segments per vertical curve. The recommended setting of 10 will make most vertical curves appear smooth.
- Segments per Spiral Curve
- Sets the number of segments per spiral curve. The recommended setting of 10 will make most spiral curves appear smooth.
- Quick dynaviews
- Toggles the display and plotting of objects through dynaviews. When toggled on, objects displayed through dynaviews will not appear within the dynaviews. Only the dynaview frame will be visible. This option speeds display and plotting when the objects drawn through the dynaview need not be viewed. This is particularly helpful when you are arranging dynaviews within the Sheet view mode.
- Quick text
- Toggles the way text objects are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all text objects are displayed and plotted as text boxes. The text boxes will be drawn to the limits of the text objects and can be used to select and manipulate the text objects. When toggled off, text objects are displayed and plotted normally. The Quick Text setting does not affect the display and plotting of attribute text.
- Quick EAT codes
- Toggles the way embedded attribute text (EAT) codes are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all EAT codes are displayed and plotted as the actual codes and not the interpreted value. When toggled off, EAT codes are displayed and plotted as the interpreted value.
- Quick linetype
- Toggles the way linetypes are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all linetypes are displayed and plotted as solid lines, making both the display and plotting of lines faster. When toggled off, linetypes are displayed and plotted using their full definition.
- Ignore hide
- Toggles the way hidden set segments are displayed and plotted. When Ignore Hide is on, set segments hidden by HIDE are displayed and CONVERT converts hidden set segments to plines.
- Hold DV scale
- Toggles the way attribute text and the linetype scales are displayed and plotted within dynaviews. When toggled on, attribute text and linetypes are scaled within the individual dynaviews in which they are displayed, based on the scale assigned to the dynaview, as opposed to being based on the plot scale of the viewing mode in which the attribute text or line is drawn. This allows you to create multiple dynaviews showing the same object or even of the same viewport at varying scales. In this case, the attribute text and linetypes appear in accordance with their definition, regardless of subsequent alterations of the plot scale of the viewing mode in which these objects are drawn. When toggled off, attribute text and linetypes as displayed within a dynaview, are scaled based on the current plot scale of the target viewing mode, and their appearance will change as that plot scale is altered. Text objects are not affected by this setting. If a text object is smaller than the number of pixels set in the Text Box Size option of the Display Settings dialog box, it will also appear as a text box.
- Drag Text Quick
- Drag Text Quick sets the way text is displayed when you drag it. When its check box is checked, it distorts the text so the text can be dragged quickly. When its check box is not checked, it displays the text so you can read it when you drag it, which slows the process.
- Point size
- Set the size in pixels for a cross symbol for for each point. For many high resolution graphics cards, point objects drawn with two or three pixels will enable you to see the points on the screen more clearly.
- Text box size
- This integer control sets the number of pixels used to determine when a text box will automatically be drawn.
Text objects and attribute text that are smaller than the number of pixels you enter will be displayed as a text box.
This setting speeds screen redraw by quickly drawing text as a box when it is too small to read on your display.
If you set the text box size to 0, Terramodel will always draw the text characters.
The Quick Text option displays your text as text boxes regardless of the height of the text in pixels.
| Command | Settings\Display settings | S |
Display the distance between two locations.
Display the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls.
The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale.
You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset.
The locations can be limited by object snaps.
See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT and GEOMRPTS.
| Command | Reports\Distance | S | 17 |
Divide a line into intervals.
Create points along a set or pline at intervals.
You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets.
See also 3D, GC28, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET and GC68.
| Command | Draw\Point\Divide Line | S | 13 |
Export a USGS DLG (optional format) file.
Export a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.
See Terramodel help for details.
| 29/10/08 | Help | File\Misc. Import/Export\USGS DLG-O Export | S |
Import a USGS DLG (optional format) file
Import a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.
See Terramodel help for details.
| 29/10/08 | Help | File\Misc. Import/Export\USGS DLG-O Import | S |
Write a DLG (optional format) file.
| 29/10/08 | ADD 9.3 156 | File\Misc. Import/Export\USGS DLG-O Export | S |
Dimension between two locations.
Draw pline segments between locations and label the segments with text showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 91 |
List Terramodel documents.
List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files installed with Terrmodel Geocomp Update.
The associated sample data sets are installed into C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update | 218 |
Drafting settings.
Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.
- Flip over angle
- Configure the angle when attribute set segment labels are automatically flipped so that they can be read from left to right, from the right-hand side and the bottom of the sheet. Valid entries for this parameter are from 0° to 45°. If the value is set to 45°, the label will be upside down if read from the bottom of the sheet, but will appear correct when read from the right-hand side of the sheet. The angle should generally remain at 0° or 10°. This angle is applied to each dynaview so that the same labels can be oriented properly through multiple dynaviews.
- Text clip margin
- Set the amount of space around text objects, for CONTOUR, CLIP and HATCH when clipping lines to text. Typical values range from 0.3 to 0.5 times the height of the text object. This value also controls the spacing between text and its associated text border, with the exception of the Underline border style which uses the following offset distance value.
- Offset distance from line/arc
- Set the distance between a line or curve and its label. This value also controls the offset between the line generated by an Underline text border style and the first and second lines of text when that style is used. Typically, enter a value at least twice the diameter of your largest pen.
- Space (%) between lines of text
- Establish the spacing between lines of attribute text or lines of text objects. A typical value is 50% of the text height.
- Fixed Detail Border Size
- Configure the fixed height for all text borders with a Detail border style. Borders with other text border styles, vary in height according to the limits of the text and the above text clip margin.
- Text Line Colours
- Configure the colours for leader lines and borders associated with text.
These global settings affect all text in the project file.
- Leader Lines
- The colour for text leader lines
- Underlines
- The colour for all text borders with Underline text border style
- Margin Lines
- The colour for all text borders with Margin text border styles.
- Enclosed Borders
- The colour for text with other text border styles.
- Underline title Text Enlargement (%)
- Increase the height of the first line of multi-line text with Underline text border style by this percentage (e.g. 20%). If you use PLOTSET to map the plotter pen selection to the text height, the first line use a different plotter pen.
| Command | Settings\Draft settings... | S | 90 |
Create sets with 3D points where selected plines cross DTM links.
If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\Drape plines | S | 298+400+252 |
Import Drag Head log file.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Report drainage details to a CSV file.
Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | DGE 10 |
Label a drill hole.
Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole.
The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style.
The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Label segment with grade and direction.
The grade is written parallel to the segment in two formats. A pline of leaderline linetype showing direction is drawn between the text and the segment.
See also LABGRADE .
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.
Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.
The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D for PowerGrade3D.
See also DTM2XML , ROAD_RUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX .
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.
DTM2XML excludes triangles inside dead areas.
See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.
See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Update all DTM layers | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges.
Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges to the P3Pad report editor.
The slope ranges for which areas are to be reported are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file.
This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16).
To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope.
The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.
See also SLOPE, GC44 and GC82.
| Command | DTM\DTM area | S | 117 |
Change the current DTM layer.
The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor.
To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT.
The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Change current DTM layer | Geocomp Update or $25 | 1 |
Project a cone onto a DTM.
Given an x, y location, interpolate the height from a DTM and create a 3D point on the current layer a specified elevation difference above. Then, in horizontal directions 5° apart, project from this point at the nominated vertical angle until the DTM surface is reached. Create a pline or set in the current layer joining the points. If a set, lines from the central point are added to help in DTM formation.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1251 | DTM\Conical projection to DTM | S |
Create a set around a DTM edge.
The set is on the DTM layer in the current colour.
The current link settings determine the extent of the DTM.
The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings.
Multiple contiguous sets around a DTM will still function as a DTM edge, but allow DESIGN and MOVEPAD to use variable batters.
You can edit a DTM edge set using BREAK, SET and so on.
If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.
| Command | DTM\DTM edge | S |
Interpolate a grid over a DTM.
Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary.
See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, GRDPTS and TRMBGRID.
| Command | DTM\Generate DTM grid | S | 221 |
List DTM information by layer for selected points.
List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.
The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points.
The DTM status shows which layers have been linked and whether they are part of a Multilayer DTM.
The selected DTM layers relinked. If you want a report of duplicate points, run GC92 first.
See also LAYINFO, OLIST and LIST.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\List DTM layers | Geocomp Update or $25 | 290 |
Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.
This process is typically required two merge two DTMs created by photogrammetry.
By matching the DTM layers, contour lines will match perfectly at the user specified match line. Alternatively the contour lines can be relayered and joined using JOIN. See also GCMATCH which matches contours only and GCMERGE which merges multiple DTMs.
- DTM
- Select two DTM layers to be matched
- LINE
- Select a pline along which the DTMs are to be matched
- DEF
- DTM Match Defaults dialog box
- NORMAL MERGE
- Specify the type of elevation adjustment to be applied to the points.
- On
- Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the distance from the elevation of the point to its interpolated elevation to the other DTM layer. This method moves each point towards the other DTM. In the event the DTM layers cross in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move up and others down. Generally this is the preferred method.
- Off
- Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the elevation from layer 1 to layer 2 on the match line perpendicular to the point being adjusted. This method moves each point based on the condition at the match line. If the DTM layers intersect in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move away from the other DTM.
- MAX ADJ WIDTH
- Specify the maximum distance from the line in which points will be adjusted.
Tips on using DTMMATCH command
- The objects on the matched layers can be relayered to the same DTM layer for relinking.
- DTMMATCH makes significant modifications to the project data including deleting points. We strongly recommend that you keep a copy of the original data by using SAVEAS before you start.
- If DTMMATCH is to be used several times in one project file, save your work at each step.
- Before beginning DTMMATCH, you must have two DTM layers that overlap.
- Along the overlap create a single-segment pline or set where two DTMs are to match. Only points that fall within the length of the segment will be erased.
- Match lines should not be significantly longer than the limits of the DTM as this can prevent Terramodel from properly determining which points should be deleted.
- Set lines that cross the match line are clipped. A point will be created to hold each clipped set. The DTMs will re-link if required.
- Elevations of points that fall within the length of the line and the specified adjustment width will be adjusted according to the method specified. A set is created on each DTM along the match line through the points created. All points outside the match line for each DTM are deleted. The maximum elevation difference found along the match line, and the number of points adjusted, are reported.
| Command | DTM\DTM Match | S |
Create points by comparison with two DTMs.
Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs.
In the Settings, specify the formula, whether to use the points from the first or second layers, or both and whether to report the results.
See also GC70.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.
Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface.
Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations.
Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use GCNOELEV or ELEVATION (Absolute) to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *.
See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM.
See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations.
See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM.
See also DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET and ELVPLINE.
| Command | DTM\DTM Pts | S | 236 |
Create sets from DTM links.
Triangles sides are links on a DTM layer.
Specify the new DTM layer, whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets) and whether to create complete triangles (or just the links).
If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar.
Links inside dead areas are omitted.
If you are exporting to an application that prefers DXF or DWG 3DFaces, use the AutoCAD Export script instead.
See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Create sets from links | Geocomp Update or $25 | 156+SDS-DXF |
Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.
Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM.
Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle.
The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM.
The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.
| Command | DTM\DTM shot | S |
Display the highest and lowest elevations of a point in a layer.
Also lists the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation.
The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circles mark the higher point. The markers disappear on refresh.
Includes all points on the layer including non-contourable points. See also RANGE and EVALDTM.
| 01/09/11 | ADD 9.3 156 | DTM\DTM statistics | S | 169 |
Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.
Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first.
GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Update current DTM layer | Geocomp Update or $25 | 289 |
Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.
| 29/10/08 | S |
Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.
Remove segments from triangular sets which join the same points as a segment on another set.
Use DUPLTRIS to reduce the number of points and segments in an imported DTM.
To create a DTM surface with the same shape as the original used to create the triangles, create all triangle sides.
To allow the DTM to be reformed without flat triangles, only create the sets along the shortest triangle sides and enable "Remove flat triangles" in LINKSET.
Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. See also CLEANSET.
To simplify the shape of a DTM surface, see 3DFILTER.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a map file.
Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a file which maps unique sequential numbers to layer names.
To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:
- SAVEAS the project so you have a backup.
- GCMAPOUT to relayer selected objects onto layers with sequential names beginning with GC_GG and export a corresponding mapping file.
- Export objects to a .DXF file in Release 2000 format.
- DXFCHANG to create a new DXF file with layer names corresponding to the original object names according to the map file.
For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.
| 07/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create dynaviews.
Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location.
For instance, you can create one dynaview around a part of the plan view, create a second dynaview around the same part in profile view, and combine these into a plan and profile sheet in sheet view. You can also create a enlarged view of a detailed area.
The advantage of a dynaview it that it is a dynamic view of the design, not just a copy. This saves memory, eliminates transposition errors and, when the design is updated, the dynaview is updated automatically.
-
Dynaview Options
- BOX
- Select the closed set or pline that defines the dynaview.
- LOC
- Enter the location of the origin for the new dynaview. The origin of a dynaview is the first vertex of the box pline.
- SCALE
- Set the scale at which the new dynaview is drawn. The default scale is the plot scale for the view of the selected Box. Use VIEWSET to preview or modify plot scale for any view.
- ROT
- Set the angle of rotation for the dynaview. The angle of rotation is measured clockwise relative to the closed polygon. The default angle rotates the dynaview so that its base aligns with the east-west axis.
See also PLANSET, MIRRORDY, FIXDYNA, MVIEW, SCLPLOTB, DISPLAYSET, LLIST and SCLBLKS.
| Command | Draw\DynaView | S | 93 |
Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.
- SETTINGS
- Configure how volumes will be computed and reported.
- ACCUMULATE VOLUMES
- When checked, Terramodel adds previously calculated volumes to the volumes being calculated. You enter previous cut and fill volumes in the real number control shown. The default values will be the cut and fill totals from the last volume calculation. If the box is not checked, the Previous excavation and Previous fill options will be greyed out.
- SHRINK/SWELL FACTORS
- These real number controls let you enter factors which will be applied to calculated volumes to obtain excavation and fill quantities. Note: Generally, only the fill factor should be varied, leaving the excavation factor at 1.0.
- COMPUTATION METHOD
-
- VOLUMES TOTALS ONLY
- When the Volume Totals Only option is selected, only the total volumes will be reported.
- VOLUMES BY DEPTH INCREMENT
- When the Volumes by Depth Increment option is selected, the excavation/fill volumes calculations will be reported by a depth increment. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right.
- VOLUMES BY ELEVATION RANGE
- When the Volumes by Elevation Range is selected, the excavation/fill volumes calculations will be reported by elevation range. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right. Terramodel uses the value entered in the index elevation control as a basis for calculating the intervals. For example, if the interval is 2 metres, the index elevation is 100.5 metres, and the elevation range of the excavation/fill area is 98.5 to 106.5, the volumes are calculated for 98.5-100.5, 100.5-102.5, 102.5-104.5, 104.5-106.5, etc. As you can see in this example, Terramodel automatically finds the minimum and maximum elevations for the excavation/fill volume and reports the volumes over the entire elevation range.
- ISOPACH DATA CREATION
-
- SAVE COMPUTED ISOPACH
- When checked, the isopach surface will be stored on the selected layer. When not checked, the isopach surface is computed in the same manner and then automatically deleted.
- ISOPACH COLOURS
- Select the colours for points in areas of excavation, points in area of fill in the isopach, and breaklines.
- SURFACE TO SURFACE
- Compute and report cut and fill volumes between two DTM surfaces.
- SURFACE TO DATUM
- Compute and report cut and fill volumes between a DTM surface and a datum.
- STOCKPILE
- Compute and report the volume of a measured stockpile, based on an assumed underlying surface.
- DEPRESSION
- Compute and report the volume of a measured depression or excavation, based on an assumed original surface.
- ISOPACH
- Compute and report cut and fill volumes associated with a previously stored isopach surface.
Tips on using EARTHWORK command.
- DTM
- A Digital Terrain Model is also referred to as a Triangulated Irregular Network or TIN.
- Isopach
- The isopach surface is the surface representing the difference between two other surfaces. Isopachs are contours extracted from the isopach surface. CONTOUR or TVLITE the saved isopach surface to check for erroneous data in the other surfaces.
- Quick isopach generation
- For an accurate volume, make sure Quick isopach generation in LINKSET is OFF so that all the intersection points between the triangles are included in the isopach surface.
- Pond Volumes
- The volume of water displayed is the excavation volume rather than the fill volume.
- Initial Surface to Design Surface Volumes
- If your design surface has batters to an existing surface, project the batters using DESIGN or SIDESLOPE before calculating volumes to insure that the design sideslopes are projected. Otherwise, vertical sideslopes may be projected up or down.
- Surface to Surface Computation
- Surface-to-surface volumes are calculated by computing the isopach between two DTMs or between a datum and a DTM. First, each point is projected onto the other surface, the corresponding elevation interpolated, and the elevation difference is stored with the generated isopach point. The breaklines (of both surfaces are used to generate isopach breaklines. Additional points are inserted into the isopach breaklines where they cross DTM triangles.
- Computation
- The triangulated isopach surface is used to determine the volume by breaking the data for each triangle into the appropriate number of truncated vertical prisms. If the three points of a triangle all have positive or all have negative elevations (all fill or all cut) then a single triangular prism is present. If the isopach triangle has both positive and negative elevations (cut and fill) then the triangle is broken into a triangular prism and a quadrilateral prism. See Terramodel Help for this command for illustrations.
- The volume of each prism is equal to the average height (that is isopach elevation) times the planimetric area. The total fill volume for the isopach is the sum of all positive prismoidal volumes. The total cut volume is the sum of all negative prismoidal volumes.
- This method is more accurate than cross section or grid methods using average end area. The differences obtained between methods depend on the size of the grid or interval of cross sections and irregularity of the surfaces. Smooth surfaces may show differences of less than 1%. Some test cases have shown differences of as much as 10% when the cross section interval is 50 foot and the terrain is rough. As the size of the grid or cross section interval decreases to a very small value, the volumes of these methods agree with volumes computed from the isopach surface triangles.
- The accuracy of the calculations is no better than the accuracy of the data and the calculated DTM. If breaklines are not properly used to form the proper TIN, good point data can produce bad volumes. If an insufficient number of points are used to describe a surface, then irregularities from the recorded data to the actual ground will produce volumes differing from field conditions.
- Additional points
- To roughly estimate how many extra points you must allow for when setting the maximum number of points in Terramodel, using SYSTEM command, add the number of points in the two surfaces and multiply by two. Terramodel has a limit of 8 million points. Some of these points will be duplicate. A point is duplicate if it is on the same layer and is within 1 mm. Duplicate points are often created when computing the isopach surface, especially if a boundary line is used. Duplicate points are relayered to layer 0 during the linking process. These these points can then be deleted from layer 0 to save space.
- Special Case: Link setting "remove flat triangles"
- Normally triangles are created to be as equilateral (equal interior angles) as possible. The "remove flat triangles" setting in LINKSET changes the DTM to eliminate, as much as possible, flat areas. This technique is usually used on data from imported contours, forcing each triangle to have a slope. If the points along a set line are within a tolerance of the first point on the set line then flat triangles are removed. Adding and or removing break lines may be required to achieve the desired results. Note that "flat" lines in DXF and DWG files are automatically imported as plines, so you have to CONVERT to sets.
- DTM Edge
- Once you have the correct link settings for a DTM, use DTMEDGE to fix the boundary to with a bounding set. Then you can change link settings on another surface without effecting the first surface.
See also XVOLUMES.
EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME.
| Command | DTM\Earthwork volumes | S | DTM 3 |
Create an earthwork report.
See also GCEARTH and XVOLUMES.
If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1005 | Roads\Reports\Earthwork... | S | 471 |
Edit any object.
Edit these properties of any object according to object type.
- Sets
- A set is a string of straight or arc segments joining point objects.
- Replace a point with another point.
- Insert a point into a set before a selected point.
- Append a point to the end of a set.
- Delete a selected point from the set. If the set contains only two points, the entire set is deleted.
- Reverse the order of the points. See also REVERSE.
- Change the set Smoothness. See SETSMOOTH.
- Reorder the points of the set so that the selected point becomes the first point in the set, the next point becomes the second and so on.
- Swap the first specified point with the second specified point
- Toggle the subtended angle of an arc between > and < 180°.
- Change cut and fill Slope values.
- Open or close the set. A closed set connects the first point and last point with a set segment.
- Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent) and start chainage.
- Plines
- A pline is a string of straight or curved segments with a single elevation.
- Move an IP (PI, intersection point, control point, cp or vertex) from one location to another
- Insert a vertex before the selected vertex
- Append one or more vertices to the end of the pline
- Delete the selected vertex
- Reverse the order of the vertices of a selected pline.
- Spline or desplines the pline
- Reorder the vertices of a pline
- Swap the first specified vertex with the second specified vertex
- Close or open the pline
- Undo the last change to pline
- Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent), start chainage, elevation
- Text
-
- If the text was created by LABELSEG, segment point numbers are displayed. Use LABELSEG to edit these text objects.
- Copy text from another text object
- Enter up to 255 characters of text
- Origin is the text insertion location
- Elevation
- The bearing orients the text.
- Open the Eat Code Insertion Aid Dialog Box
- Leader line colours are set globally by DRAFTSET.
- Select the leader line style, indicating the use of a leader line, or [none]. If the subject text is a segment label, you can also select the Crows Feet style (dimension arrows). Toggle crow's feet with CROWFOOT.
- Select leader line linetype. The leader line is drawn from the subject being labeled to the text
- Designate the location to which the leader line points. The leader line will normally point to the subject of a callout, but it can actually point anywhere you wish
- Assign a gap in project units between the leader line point and the beginning of the leader line. If the gap is expressed as negative, the gap scales with the view scale
- Select the border style and linetype. See also DRAFTSET
- The attributes of a subject of the text object can be used in EAT codes
- An alignment from which the callout's subject can be locate for EAT codes which display a chainage and offset
- EAT Extended attribute text
- Text Metrics. See TEXTMETRIX.
- Change CAD Properties: layer, colour, group, reference object (parent)
- Blocks
-
- Change properties: layer, colour, group, reference object, name, origin, elevation, auto scale, map colour, auto rotation, and subject point number
- The block can be scaled in X, Y and Z, and rotated about those axes.
- If the block is tied to a point number, the point and block will move together.
- If AutoScale is ON, the block changes size with the view scale
- If Map Colour is ON for this block, the block is displayed in the block colour. If OFF, in the colours of the objects in the block. When a block is first created, the block colour is the same as the line colour of the layer.
- If Auto rotation is ON, the block is rotated so that it is displayed through a dynaview so it can be read from the left or bottom of a sheet.
- If you change the block name, the appearance will change to match the appearance of any existing block with the new name.
- Use commands like BLOCK, UNITBLK, MKBLKINT, SCLBLKS and AUTODRAFT to control block placement.
- Dynaviews
-
- Change properties: layer, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.
- If Auto off is ON, this turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.
- The boundary is the closed pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.
- You can limit each dynaview to display only those layers on a nominated layer list. See LLISTSET.
- The dynaview is located at the first vertex in the boundary pline
- Points
-
- Change properties: point number, layer, colour, group, name, contourability, location, elevation and label.
- See LABELPOINT for point labelling.
- Tables
-
- See LABELTABLE command
| Command | Edit\Edit object | S | 32 |
Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation.
Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation.
If the current name is not blank, you can overwrite, prefix or suffix.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle
Modify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle.
If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.
- If *
- The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
- If <
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
- If >
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members.
See also ELEVREFPLANE.
| Command | Modify\Elevation\Along set | S |
Modify the elevation of selected objects.
Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.
Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.
Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.
One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes.
See also GCELEV which has a clearer dialog.
See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.
| Command | Modify\Elevation\Elevation | S | 9 |
Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.
Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.
See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\From DTM | Geocomp Update or $25 | 237 |
Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle
Modify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface.
The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle.
The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.
- If *
- The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
- If <
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
- If >
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
See also ELEVREFPT.
| Command | Modify\Elevation\Reference plane | S |
Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle
Modify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship.
If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.
If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.
- If *
- The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
- If <
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
- If >
- The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
| Command | Modify\Elevation\Reference point | S |
Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.
The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Elevation at chainage | U |
Create an ellipse.
Select a pline segment for the major axis, the width of the minor axis and the number of segments in the pline.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Pline\Ellipse | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create points at the insertion point of selected text with elevations from the text.
Create point entities using the insertion point of the text for the coordinates of the point. The text string is the source of the elevation assigned to the point.
See also TEXT2PT for one point at a time and TEXT2PNT which also does blocks.
This feature can be used to convert points on 2D plans, where the elevations are presented as text labels, to 3D.
Since the insertion point of the text will not usually match the point that the text refers to, some bulk shifting or editing may be required.
| 01/09/11 | U | 317 |
Change the elevation of selected plines based on the average elevation of each vertex of the pline on a specified DTM layer.
The elevation is rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use this to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.
| 29/10/08 | Modify\Elevation\Pline elev. from DTM | S |
Import a GeoPak alignment report
Read a specific GeoPak alignment file format.
See also RDSCACALN and RDSGPALIGN.
| 29/10/08 | S |
Define error ellipse attributes
Define attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points.
These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT.
RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated.
Requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.
| 27/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Evaluate a DTM
Report potential problems with DTM breakline formation.
For each breakline set on the layer, report which segments and points are not used.
Every straight set segment which connects to two 3D, contourable points on the same DTM layer is a breakline.
- The report lists the:
- Segments of a DTM set which are not used, usually due to a crossing breakline
- 2D Points which are used in a DTM set
- Non-contourable points which are used in a DTM set
- Points on different layers which are used in a DTM set
| 02/06/11 | DTM\Evaluate DTM surface | Geocomp Update or $100 | 140 |
Execute an external program
Use arguments to specify the external program and pass variables. This is often used with ALIAS.
See also RUN.
| Command | S | 200 |
Exit Terramodel
Save recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel.
If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting.
When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by by deleting objects.
See also RUN.
| Command | File\Exit | S | 0 |
Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes
Explode selected blocks into component parts, and text and complex linetypes into plines.
Optionally, delete the old objects.
The exploded components are created on the current layer only. Use GCEXPLOD instead to explode to the same layer as the block while and retain the elevations and names.
Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks.
Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links.
Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected. If you want to separate a line into segments, use DISJOIN instead.
To select or restrict by Type, such as blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.
| Command | Edit\Explode | S |
Open Windows Explorer.
Open Windows Explorer file manager.
Windows Explorer is also known as Explore, My Computer and Computer.
| Alias | user definable |
Export data using scripts.
Using a system of programmable scripts, export to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD (dwg and .dxf), TDS, Carlson, LandXML, Microstation DGN and Terramodel PRO.
You can also upload the file to some survey instruments.
The Export Script Manager EXPORTSMGR controls the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also IMPORT and DFEDIT.
| Command | UG, FDM User Guide | File\Export/Upload | S | 188,FC D,FC I |
Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.
Given a road job surface, create a Geocomp .CES cross section file or a detailed cross section report similar to that produced by Geocomp RDP 482, or both.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 | 402,482 |
Export script manager.
Open the Export script manager where you can create, edit, and delete export scripts.
You can also run an export script from the script manager by selecting the script and clicking the Run button.
For Help, Press F1 while creating a script.
The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the \Shared\ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the EXPORT menu and the file extension is .xi. If not ticked, it is not visible, and .xi_.
| Command | File\Export/Upload\Export script manager | S |
Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.
Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range.
Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations.
The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.
| 01/09/11 | S |
Extend a line to boundaries or by a distance.
If "To bdy" is ticked, extend a pline or set to the first of the selected boundaries.
If "To bdy" is not ticked, extend by a specified distance.
The end of the line is moved to the new location, with the option of creating a new point at the previous end location.
Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended.
| Command | Edit\Extend | S | 276 |
Favourite commands.
Edit a history of up to 30 Terramodel favourite and most recently used commands.
Commands from this history are available by right-clicking in the graphics area when prompted for a Terramodel command.
Enable command completion to anticipate commands from this history as you type.
| Command | File\System configuration\Favorites | S | 201 |
Import ASCII points into square regions in separate project files.
Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored.
For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on.
Project Variable MAX_NUMBER_OF_FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.
| 01/09/11 | S |
Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.
- Select the first segment using the Seg1 locate control.
- Select the second segment that intersects the first using the Seg1 locate control.
- Input the radius for the arc using the Radius distance control.
- Specify whether to trim the two selected line segments using the Trim check box. When the box is checked, the lines are trimmed to the point at which the fillet arc is added. If a radius of 0 is used, the lines will be trimmed to the point at which the lines intersect.
- Click OK to create the fillet.
| Command | Draw\Arc\Fillet | S | 73 |
Filter vertices in plines.
Replace selected plines with plines made up of straight segments within a filter "box". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for plines containing straights, such as contours, and increase the vertices for splines, arcs and spirals.
The initial filter box is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the pline with width perpendicular to the segment.
FILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.
See also BLFILTER, GCFILTER and SETFILT.
| Command | Draw\Pline\Filter | S | DTM F |
Fix breaklines connected to duplicate points in layer 0.
For each set on the selected DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a point on layer 0, and there is another point on the selected layer at the same X and Y location, change the set to connect to the point on the DTM layer instead.
For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set".
When duplicate contourable points are on a layer and any DTM is formed, one of the points is relayered to layer 0. If one of the points is connected to a set, the point in the set is usually changed so to enable the breakline and "Set Node changed" is shown in the message scroll. Use FIXDTM command when the automatic DTM formation does not correct the point number in the set.
GC31 will also fix this problem.
| 07/09/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.
Create a new plotbox pline to replace each selected plotbox which has an associated dynaview and change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox.
You can also delete the old plotbox and plines and text referring to the plotbox.
Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Fix layers.
Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes.
When you delete multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, LAYERSET can corrupt a layer attribute in the project so that Terramodel cannot compute volumes by end-area using commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE, and materials are not shaded in colour.
Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.
| 01/09/11 | S |
Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.
Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view into an drawing in a selected "Plan" view.
The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.
See also FLIPUP, BGELEV and GC56.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Flip\Flip down | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.
Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view.
The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position.
The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points.
The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z.
The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.
See also FLIPDOWN, BGELEV and GC56.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Flip\Flip up | Geocomp Update or $100 |
List or change fonts of selected text.
Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change all selected of that font to a specified font.
Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts.
The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text.
The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini.
If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a font, the font of the text is still changed to that font, but is displayed with the default font, usually TMODELF. To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into the fonts folder, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add to the ini file when prompted.
See also LISTFONT and TEXTMETRICS.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Text\Font | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Apply horizontal design to a road alignment.
Select a registered HAL of IPs, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, superelevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes!
Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.
The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio.
Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length.
Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise just pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections.
FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania.
See also FORESTTB.
| Custom | POA |
Report offsets for a forest road.
Use with FORESTRD.
| Custom | POA |
Export FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.
Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to setout and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments.
FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Toggle point number labels.
Label points with point numbers. Run F7 again to turn point numbers off.
Replace any point labels placed by F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the point numbers toggle and the visibility of the elevation and name labels is unchanged.
Other point symbols and other blocks are unchanged.The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.
The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.
The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These point labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label points with numbers | Geocomp Update or $25 | F7,136 |
Toggle circle symbols.
Label points with circle symbols (symbol 40). Run F8 again to turn circle symbols off.
Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.
The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.
The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.
The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
See also F8C which allows you to control the symbol number and size and F8T which places a temporary marker.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\label points with circles | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Toggle preset symbol.
Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off.
Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.
To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+).
The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.
To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10.
The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.
The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
See also F8 which uses symbol 40 (circle) and F8T which places a temporary marker.
To make F8C readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8C to F8.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Place temporary markers on points.
Place temporary markers on all points in visible layers.
The marker size is dependent on the current view scale.
The markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not plotted.
The marker colour is not the same as point colour.
Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged.
To make F8T readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8T to F8.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | F8,137 |
Toggle elevations.
Label points with elevations. Run F9 again to turn elevations off.
Replace any point labels placed by F7 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the elevations toggle and the visibility of the point number and name labels is unchanged.
Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged.
The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.
The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.
The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label points with elevations | Geocomp Update or $25 | F9,138 |
Toggle names.
Label points with names (descriptions). Run F11 again to turn names off.
Replace any point labels placed by F7, F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the names toggle and the visibility of the point number and elevation labels is unchanged.
Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged.
The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.
The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.
The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label points with names | Geocomp Update or $25 | F10,110 |
Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.
Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive.
To remove characters within the range, select Delete.
To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete.
The values are stored as project variables.
Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value.
See also SNR.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\More...\Truncate name | Geocomp Update or $25 | rdes |
Change the name of selected points to include chainage and offset from HAL.
Optionally include chainage, offset, label HAL Pts and append or replace.
See also NFS for chainage only.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\More...\Name by Ch+Offset | Geocomp Update or $25 | 176 |
Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.
Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.
In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets
The report includes pline vertices.
If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.
The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.
See also GC03A to use a master HAL, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.
| 02/03/12 | Reports\More...\Chainage and offset | Geocomp Update or $25 | 122 |
Report chainage and offset from master HAL.
Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.
Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line.
In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets
The report includes pline vertices.
If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.
The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.
See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Chainage and offset | Geocomp Update or $25 | 122 |
Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.
Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade, As-Built Grade, Name, Easting and Northing.
You can select points, a HAL and VAL, and enter the design offset, and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade.
See also GC03.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 122 |
Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.
Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.
In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets and specify a secondary HAL and VAL.
The report includes pline vertices.
If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.
The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally. See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 122 |
Create mid-points on short plines.
Where a two-point pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point.
If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, the duplicate point is omitted.
A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD.
See also ILINE to intersect lines, GC31 and DIVIDE command.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 314 |
Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Round elevations in project file.
Changes elevations to rounded values.
Only use GC06 where you cannot round the displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Helmert transformation.
Using pairs of points, compute a best fit of shift, rotation and scale then transform the selected data.
- Objects
- Select the objects to be transformed
- Use Form
- Enter up to nine control point/data point pairs into the form by point number or mouse. Give each a weighting of the number of times each pair is to be used. Then Calculate the Rotation, Scale, East Shift and North Shift for each pair. If the reported residuals are acceptable, click Transform Objects. If you will need to make the same transformation with different objects, store the Transformation Values as project variables or to a .HMT file.
- Use Stored Values
- Selectable if transformation values have been stored as project variables using the form.
- Use Stored Values from file
- Use a .HMT file stored using the form.
- Read Control/Data points from a file
- Read point pairs and weights from a .csv file. Use this when you have more than nine point pairs, or they are supplied in a table. The file format is either Control_Point_number,Data_Point_Number or Control_Point_number,Data_Point_Number,Weight.
- Transform Points
- Transform point pairs defined by stored values or CSV file.
The HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters.
See also GC38 for Affine transformation, which uses different scale factors in North and East, and GC3DROT, GC3DADJfor 3D transformation.
If shifting, rotating or scaling around a single point, use MOVE, SCALE, ROTATE or RTSCALE.
| 02/08/10 | Modify\Transform\Helmert | Geocomp Update or $75 | 37 |
Places blocks or symbols by group.
A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed.
Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function.
GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required.
To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 90 |
List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.
For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals.
Optionally, report areas of closed figures.
No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations.
Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.
This report is designed to be printed.
| 01/09/11 | Report\More...\Lengths + areas | Geocomp Update or $100 | 275 |
Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.
For each selected point, report the Point number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Name.
The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM.
Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM.
Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *.
Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".
| 24/10/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 224 |
List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.
For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length, the totals.
Optionally, report areas of closed figures.
No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations.
Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.
This report is comma-separated so it can be saved as a CSV file for use in a spreadsheet application.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 275 |
Import 12D ASCII file.
Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from .12DA file.
You can specify a user-defined comma-separated mapping files for colour, layer name and line styles.
Colour mapping files with extension .CNN are in the format in the format 12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number. Examples are installed in the \Geocomp folder.
The layer name mapping file with extension .LNM is in the format 12DA model name, Terramodel layer number. Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. Layer names that are longer than 16 characters are shortened to fit.
If you select an .LSM file, any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file.
If you leave a LNM or LSM mapping file field blank, you are prompted to create a new one using suggested values adopted for records found in the 12DA file.
Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered.
Hidden segments can be ignored.
Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible by ARCENTRE.
| 01/02/13 | File\Misc. import\12DA | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Export 12D ASCII file.
Export .12DA file for 12D software.
You can specify objects, a DTM layer, file name, a colour map, a layer name map and a line style map.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. export\12DA | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.
Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name.
See also GC03.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.
This .DAT file is used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies.
See also GC14.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.
Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name.
See also GC14.
| 11/11/09 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.
Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name.
See also GC03.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.
Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length.
Points will also be deleted with sets.
GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Change line colour and linestyle based upon group.
Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects according the group number of each object using a mapping file such as GEOCOMP.CLT.
See also GC16ADC, COLRLINE, GCIMPORT and GCCSVIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 90 |
Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.
Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft.
GC16ADC requires an ADC report file which you can create in AUTODRAFT by selecting the Full Report.
Blocks names are also changed to match.
See also GC16.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Calculate where points on a set intersect a nominated DTM layer given bearing and slope.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 412 |
Compute the cut and fills volumes of selected boundaries and places them in a report.
Compute the cut & fill volume for selected sets or plines. The results for the individual boundaries are placed in the report. The total cut & fill volumes are also calculated and placed in the report.
Also shows the ranges in x, y and z.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | DTM 3 |
Change the default Callout Style.
Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini.
For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date.
Use with an alias or toolbar.
See CALLOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 90 |
Check DTM Edge and design boundaries.
Relayer all contourable 3D points outside the boundary set from the DTM layer to another layer.
Report which points are relayered.
Check boundary for closure and usage of all boundary points and segments.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Check DTM edge | Geocomp Update or $100 | 197 |
Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.
See also DTMSHOT, SIDESLOPE and SLICE.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | DTM C |
Bowditch adjustment of a lot or traverse.
Adjusts heights if present on points. Puts the adjusted set on layer "ADJUSTED".
Optionally, specify a closing point.
Only works with sets, not plines.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 62 |
Compute a single isopach from two DTMs.
Compute a temporary DTM surface of the elevation difference from two DTMs then from that surface interpolate isopachs. These isopachs represent the locations where the elevation differences between the surfaces are equal to the nominated value.
Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut/fill lines. Cut/fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the the boundary between cut and fill areas.
Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set.
The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Cut/fill line from DTMs | Geocomp Update or $100 | DTM C |
Compute multiple isopachs between two DTMs.
Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create attribute records for an object.
Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf.
GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel.
You can also delete all attributes, or just new ones.
CALLOUT and other EAT code functions can label objects with the new attributes.
See also DUMPATT to list attributes on an object. See RMGC as an example of a golf course tree database using attributes.
Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands which use new attributes.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create attribute database records for an object.
Create one or two attribute records in a MS Access database.
GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need Terramodel to link to a database.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Place chainage labels parallel to xlines.
Create text objects on the current layer with chainage values on the left, right or centre of all xlines for the nominated alignment and chainage range, including invisible xlines.
You have options to delete old chainage labels and prefix with "Ch" and use a block.
The label is prefixed with "Ch ". The number of decimal places is controlled by UNITSSET. The text size is determined by the selected text style.
If you use a block, block GC27 will be placed at each end of each Xline perpendicular to the alignment. Edit block GC27 to suit.
See also GCXLINES, LABELHAL, LABELPI and GCLABELIP.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label Xlines | Geocomp Update or $50 | 93 |
Create 3D points along HAL and VAL with chainage in name.
The points are placed within the chainage range, at the nominated interval, xlines or VAL IPs.
The elevation is interpolated from the VAL.
The name is made up from the nominated name plus the computed chainage indicated by specified text characters.
Specify whether or not to join the points with a set.
3D is a similar command with options for offsets and a chainage range.
| 01/05/12 | Draw\Point\Along HAL | Geocomp Update or $25 | 77 |
Create 3D points along HAL & VAL.
The points are placed at the nominated interval with the nominated name.
The elevation is interpolated from the VAL.
See also 3D which creates sets at offsets.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 77 |
Compute distance and direction with 3D components.
In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations.
If you select two points, or a set segment, and both points have elevations, you will also get the height difference, vertical angle and slope distance.
If you select a free location, the elevation will be interpolated from the current DTM layer, if possible.
In section views, report the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade.
Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.
| 01/09/11 | Report\Distance 3D | Geocomp Update or $25 | 17 |
Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.
In the plan view only, report the ellipsoidal distance, plane distance, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back) and arc to chord between two locations.
Using the Settings, you can also label the bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.
| 09/05/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | UTM 10 |
Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM.
Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name.
The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included.
You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.
| 05/11/09 | Reports\More...\Vertical differences | Geocomp Update or $25 | 236 |
Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with Horizontal alignment.
Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name.
The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included.
You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.
You can also create text objects showing the difference in metres or millimetres.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 236 |
Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.
Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name.
The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included.
You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Duplicate point removal on a layer with tolerances.
Specify tolerances in X, Y and Z. One point is retained and the others are moved to layer 0 for possible later deletion.
Select Report to generate a report as the duplicate points are removed.
You can choose "Mean Pts" to create the remaining point with coordinates at the mean of the points, or retain thepoint with the highest or lowest elevation. If none of the options are selected, the remaining point is the lowest point number within tolerance.
Hints:
- DTM formation, which occurs whenever a DTM is required, automatically and rapidly removes duplicate points in the DTM layer to layer 0 to tolerances of approximately 1 mm.
- CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, if "Dup pts ok" is OFF. It is much faster to CONVERT with this ON, or use a GCCONVRT, then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
- Terramodel will not remove duplicate points as it imports a DXF or DWG file unless there is a layer called DXF_NO_PT_CHK at the time of import.
- If you use GC58 to remove duplicate sets, plines and text, consider carefully whether to remove duplicate points before or afterwards.
- GC92 reports duplicate points within 1 mm with option to move them, regardless of layer.
| 18/03/13 | Edit\More...\Duplicate points | Geocomp Update or $25 | 170 |
Report visible layers in layerlists.
List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist.
The list includes the colour, linetype and number of objects for each layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 86 |
Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.
Create a DTM on the selected Higher DTM or Lower DTM layer from those all the regions of the two selected DTM layers.
The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres.
Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.
GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.
| 08/03/13 | DTM\More...\Upper or lower of 2DTMs | Geocomp Update or $100 | 240 |
Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.
Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers.
Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer.
A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention.
The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres.
Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.
GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut/fill volume estimation.
| 08/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Find and report a nominated point by number.
Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x.
The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability, set and whether an arc centre.
See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Mark\Find point | Geocomp Update or $25 | 299 |
Create points at centroids of plines and sets.
The elevation is derived from the pline or, if a set, the mean elevation of the points.
This is commonly used to compute circle centres.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\At centroids | Geocomp Update or $25 | 181 |
Move points onto a HAL.
Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL until the offset is zero.
See also GC86 to move the points by a distance.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\More...\Move points onto alignment | Geocomp Update or $25 | 120 |
Create or report cross sections at intersection of strings with xlines.
Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment.
Control the output by selecting one of more of these tick boxes:
- Create points
- Create points at the intersections on the current layer. The point name is derived from the intersecting set.
- Create CES
- Export the cross section as a Geocomp Cross section (.CES) file. This .CES file can be imported into Terramodel (see below) and other applications including Geocomp Road Design and Geocomp Spatial Data System.
- Sort offsets
- Sort the output into order of horizontal offset from centreline where overlap is not wanted, for example a roadway. Do not tick, for output in order of record number where overlap is intended, such as a tunnel.
- Report
- Report the Chainage, Offset, Elevation, (optionally) Grade and set/pline at the intersections to P3Pad.
- Show Grade
- If enabled, the report includes the grades between adjacent strings with elevations.
The DTM is not used.
If you have a road defined by sets along string lines, to make a roadway:
- Use GC37 to create a .CES file
- Register roadway alignment, create roadjob surfaces, and so on
- IMPORTXS the model into a roadway specifying Geocomp Existing as the format
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Export Geocomp cross sections | Geocomp Update or $50 | 80 |
Affine Transformation.
Using up to 10 Control Point/Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals.
Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first.
See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Transform\Affine | Geocomp Update or $100 | 161 |
Move intersection point and update Xlines.
Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval.
If you pick the main registered hal, you can move the nearest intersection point to a new location.
The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines.
Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Move IPs and update Xlines | Geocomp Update or $100 | 84 |
3D Conformal adjustment.
Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift.
Use up to 10 control/data point pairs.
To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0.
Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation.
2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed.
Possible uses:
- Adjust heights along long straight traverses.
- Confirm that a beam will fit between abutments. Fix the scale factor to 1.0.
See also GC3DROT for incremental rotation about 0,0,0, GC07 for Helmert transformation, which transforms in plan using a single scale computed factor and ROT3D which transforms in 3D space using exactly 3 control/data point pairs.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Transform\3D conformal | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Rotate points in 3D around 0,0,0 in increments.
Rotate selected points, text and blocks around 0,0,0, in radian increments. The default is 0.1 radians.
Use buttons to zoom in, zoom out and fit to display.
You can use GC3DROT to see how something will look if rotated, or to create isometric views.
Because the coordinates of the points are modified, we suggest that you GCREVIEW the objects into View 6, without deleting the old objects.
| 10/02/10 | POA |
Find the closest 3D distance between two sets.
The closest distance in 3D is displayed in the message scroll.
You can also create the points and a joining set on a specified layer.
Useful for determining whether sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. If you need to check the clearance from the outside of pipes, trenches or holes, you may need to create multiple 3D sets at offsets to work with.
See also GC75 for instantaneous horizontal distance perpendicular to an alignment.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Closest 3D distance | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create a two-arc set through three points.
Create sets consisting of two arcs connecting three points in a nominated order.
THREEPC is similar, but the middle point is not part of the single-arc set.
The difference is most noticeable when all three points have elevations, and you are using functions that interpolate elevations along sets. For example, if the middle point is a low or high point in a kerb or channel, a correct DTM requires ARCBL to take the elevation of the middle point into account, which can only happen if the middle point is included in the set.
See also BFITCURV, ARC,ARC2P and ARC2PSET.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Curves\3 points | Geocomp Update or $125 | 46 |
Compare points in two layers by coordinates.
Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.
Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z).
The standard report is in the format:
Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2
The Expanded report format is:
Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Compare layers | Geocomp Update or $25 | 182 |
Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.
Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.
Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation.
The Basic report format is:
Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2
The Expanded report format is:
Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 182 |
Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.
Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.
Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z), point tolerances in plan and elevation and whether to report as comma separated values.
The Basic report format is:
Number East North Elev DEast DNorth DElev Name
The Expanded report format is:
Chainage Offset Elev Elev DElev Name
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Pile Report
Report piles using points in two nominated layers.
Compare points in two layers representing piles.
The report can include vectors and either coordinates or chainages and offsets from the active alignment.
You can configure the search ranges, tolerance, headings and footer.
| 08/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Pile rake report
Report pile rakes using points at top and bottom of the piles in two nominated layers.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Label points in two layers with differences.
Label points in two nominated layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 332 |
Show obstructions in profile view.
Create and label points where the specified HAL crosses selected objects or passes near selected points. This clearly shows where an alignment is relative to a pipe network.
The obstructions are labelled in the profile view with circles and text.
The circle plines have diameters equal to the specified Obs Ht with another circle drawn inside. If obvert is selected, the top of the circle is placed at the elevation. If invert, the bottom of the circle. The circle will appear as an ellipse if the profile view has a vertical exaggeration other than 1.0 in VIEWSET.
You can create points on the CLASH POINTS layer in the plan view.
See also XSLABEL to add obstructions to cross section plots and SET2PRFL to draw pipes in Profile.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Streets\Profile obstructions | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.
The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *.
The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name.
The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\Reports\Compare points | Geocomp Update or $100 | 429 |
As-built roadway report.
Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design.
The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *.
Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter.
The heading shows the roadway name and description, the desired depth of the layer of material (default = 0) and the tolerances above and below that depth.
The pavement report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured vertically.
The batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth. You are prompted whether to report the horizontal offset to the batter.
If the Section Tolerance is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only.
The end of the report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences and standard deviation.
You have the option of also writing the report to a CSV file.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\Reports\Compare as-built | Geocomp Update or $100 | 435 |
Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.
Selects points within tolerance of roadway.
Use Previous to reselect the points in another command.
Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.
Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway.
Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.
See also DESIGNELEV, GC42 and GC42AB.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\Reports\Compare DTM | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.
Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb.
Report chainage and offset from selected alignment, offset difference and height difference from set, Easting, Northing, Height, Design Height and Name.
Select Inside/Outside and chainage range and tolerance.
To get chainage, offset, offset difference and height difference from a set, use the same object for both the set and the alignment.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.
Estimate approximate areas quickly.
This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage.
Assumptions:
- Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
- The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\Reports\Surface area of shapes | Geocomp Update or $250 | 475 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-delimited file.
See also GC43.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $275 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.
Only computes areas within a selected surface material.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $275 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.
Only computes areas within a selected surface material.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $275 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.
The centroid of each triangle is checked for limits of chainage range, boundary and corridor width. Then the horizontal or surface areas of all selected triangles, including parts of triangles outside the limits, are calculated and reported.
- Choose either the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
- Limit the triangle by a boundary and left and right offsets or both.
- Create points in the current layer of the triangle centroids used in the calculation.
- Enter a report heading.
- Results are reported in Slope ranges
from the SlopeTable Section of the Tmodwin.ini.
For example:
[SlopeTable] TableSize=3 0=200.0 1=100.0 2=50.0
- See also GC44S and GC44CSV.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\Reports\Surface areas by chainage | Geocomp Update or $250 | 117 |
Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, to a comma-delimited file.
GC44CSV is similar to GC44.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $275 | 117 |
Calculate surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, within surface materials.
This is similar to GC44, except it only computes the values where the centroid is within a selected surface material.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $275 |
Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.
Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval.
In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\Along HAL | Geocomp Update or $50 | 28 |
Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks.
This is ideal for computing excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used, rather than grids, which increases accuracy.
Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager. The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. You can also nominate multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation.
If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 | 247 |
Road resheet profiles.
Create profiles to use for road resheet design.
The selected points in the existing surface are compared against the centreline and templates in the roadjob.
A profile is created along the road centreline such that the nominated minimum cover is obtained at the selected points. Two other profiles are also created allowing for variations in the template crossfalls. These three profiles can then be used to help you create the final design vertical alignment.
You must have a road job with a hal, val and templates. It is easier to understand if you initially keep the Min% and Max% as 0.00.
Select the points in the existing pavement under the proposed road pavement.
The command takes each of these points, computes their offsets from the hal, then given the crossfall from the Roadway template, (e.g. 3%), computes a proposed design elevation which is the original elevation plus the crossfall times the offset, adds the Min Cover (e.g. 0.2) to this elevation, then plots a pline in the profile view (and reports to P3Pad).
If you then manually draw a Design Vertical Alignment as a pline in the Profile view, that is just above the proposed elevations then you are always guaranteed a Min Cover of 0.2.
If you use Min% and Max% that are not 0.00, then you get 2 additional plines in the profile view that use the crossfall from the Roadway template e.g. 3% AND then adds and subtracts the Min% and Max% values to the 3% so you can see the tolerance as you go.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 118 |
Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.
Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes.
The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 253,450 |
Create a point on a line at an elevation.
Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\On line at elevation | Geocomp Update or $25 | 260 |
Interpolate or extrapolate elevations on 2D points based on 3D points in the same set.
See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D and GCRIVER.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\From points in sets | Geocomp Update or $25 | 185 |
Intersection Design.
Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout.
This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of profile editing, 3D, DTM creation, etc.
Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so that you can see the updated intersection contours immediately the vertical profiles are edited.
To use this function:
- Select Settings to nominate up to nine HAL/VAL pairs.
- Select Recompute to create 3D points along the alignments (on the nominated layer using the 3D settings), regenerate a DTM of the intersection and show updated quick contours.
- Selecting the radio button for a pair, makes that alignment active, highlights the alignment and its direction in the plan view, and fits the profile view showing only referenced profiles.
- To edit profiles, make the desired alignment active with the radio button, exit the Settings dialog, pick the design profile then locate the point in the profile to edit.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Streets\Intersection design | Geocomp Update or $200 | 492+77+254 |
Change the group of selected objects.
See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Group | Geocomp Update or $25 | 40 |
Create, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points.
Make, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points.
Non-contourable points are excluded from a DTM, even 3D points on the correct layer.
This command can also relink all DTM layers so you can see how changing contourability affected the links.
Points imported from Civilcad ASC files using CVDIMPT retain their contourability status.
See also 3DFILTER which filters points from a DTM by making them non-contourable.
Set this attribute for single points using "include in DTM" in EDIT.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Include or exclude points | Geocomp Update or $25 | 257 |
Apply Geoid-Ellipsoid or Geoid-Spheroid correction.
Interpolate the separation from a suitable DTM, and subtract this value from the ellipse height points.
For example, subtract N-Values imported from an AUSGEOID98 DAT file.
See also AUSGEOID.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.
For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector.
Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.
If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, this TML can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade. Alternatively use GC90 or GC91.
See also GC55HAL.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 81 |
Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.
For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL.
Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.
See also GC55.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\From two sets | Geocomp Update or $50 | 81 |
Swap in X,Y or Z.
Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z.
Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes.
Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc.
Handles points, plines, blocks and text.
Functions that may be useful in conjunction: SCALEELV, RTSCALE, MIRROR, GC07, GC38.
See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Transform\Swap X Y Z | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create 3D points from cross sections
Cross sections must be selected in the Xsect View. They may include points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 157 |
Remove duplicate sets, plines and text
Compare objects in a layer and moves duplicates to layer 0.
Use this to removes redundant objects that have been imported multiple times.
Duplicate sets must have identical point numbers (so you might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31.).
Duplicate plines must have all identical vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc.
Sets and plines can be reversed.
Duplicate text must have the same insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.
| 01/09/11 | Edit\More...\Duplicate sets and plines | Geocomp Update or $50 | 154 |
Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey
Read a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points.
The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Radial setout report
- Pick a layer containing the station points from which you are setting out
- Select the points to set out
- Specify a limiting radial distance
For each station in turn, all points within the limit are listed. The report shows the station point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name.
Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station.
See also STAKE.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Radial setout | Geocomp Update or $50 | 41 |
Create a point at a distance along a line between two points
Nominate two points, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point.
Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered.
Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point.
To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points.
If the points have elevations, the elevation is interpolated.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\On line at distance | Geocomp Update or $50 | 28 |
Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM
For each Xline, the grade between the sets is extended until it meets the DTM. The created points are joined to create the intersection between the batter and the DTM.
A vertical or perpendicular offset (negative for down) can be applied to the batter.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets
Create points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets.
The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes.
One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter".
For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. You can also use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway.
Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.
Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a tmodwin.ini file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add Geocomp Update to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP).
If you copy tmodwin.ini from a computer with 32-bit Windows to one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the Geocomp Update, macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. When you next start Terramodel, your toolbar may have grey buttons, your menu may be different and commands with names starting with GC are not found. When this happens, type GC64BIT at the command line to update the TSP, macro and menu folders then restart Terramodel.
The Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini contains the configuration of the Terramodel user interface including the display colours of objects, background, cursor and highlighting, plotters and printers, workspace, toolbar, menu, search path, reports, favourites, view labels, callouts and coordinate scroll. P3server.ini contains settings for maximum number of objects, and the names of fonts, point labels and your prototype project file.
Tmodwin.ini is installed into C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English on 32-bit Windows or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English on 64-bit Windows if you select British English. If you select a different language during installation, the last folder is different, for example ..\English (US). The location can be elsewhere if the Windows environment variable has been set, or if Terramodel is not running As Administrator, but that is not recommended as great confusion ensues. GCHELP displays the location of the tmodwin.ini and TSP in use. In the same way, p3server.ini can be in C:\Program files\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English.
Terramodel searches the TSP for many user-editable files including the prototype project, workspace, toolbar buttons, TML commands and aliases. The Geocomp Update adds C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp or C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp to the front of the Terramodel Search Path so Terramodel can find the files added by the Geocomp Update. You can also add your own custom folder to the TSP. TSP displays the files found in the TSP.
To copy your configuration from your old computer to a new computer, copy your tmodwin.ini, p3server.ini, prototype file and custom folder if you have one then run GC64BIT if, after restarting Terramodel, the menu buttons are incorrect.
GC64BIT.TML is installed into \Terramodel\TMLs folder so it can always be found. GC64BIT replaces GCTSP.
| 11/08/11 | Geocomp Update |
Create points by chainage, offset and elevation.
If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any.
If VAL is not selected, enter the elevation, or leave it blank for no elevation.
Optionally, enter a group. If left blank, the group is 0.
Similar to the Ground option of PSTATION. See also
See also GC65FILE.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\By Ch+Offset+Elev | Geocomp Update or $50 | 344 |
Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.
The file is assumed to be a CSV with chainage, offset, elevation or chainage, offset, elevation, name on each line.
If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any.
If VAL is not selected, the elevation is used. Blank elevation records are assigned no elevation.
Station values can include + characters.
See also GC65 to type in values, IMPORTXS to import cross sections into a roadway, ALIGNIMP to import alignments only and ALIGNOFF to import alignment offsets.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Import chainage offset elevation | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create breaklines at ridges, valleys or changes of grade, in the specified DTM layer.
Ridges are triangle edges where both triangles slope down, valleys are where both triangles slope up and changes of grade are where the grade difference is larger than nominated.
This is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data.
The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer.
You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Create ridges and valleys | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.
For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal.
If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline.
If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset.
GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 66 |
Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.
For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline.
If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance.
In selected sets, for each segment longer than the specified maximum horizontal distance, insert new points and create new segments. The new segments may be the exact distance in length or shortened so each new segment is equal length.
New arc segments are created using arc lengths.
If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations interpolated onto the new points.
Use GC68 where points are too far apart for commands like SIDESLOPE and DESIGN to work properly.
Use GCPTDIST to check whether any segment has less than a minimum length.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Change zero elevations (Z = 0) to no elevation (Z = *).
2D points are often stored in DWG and DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation.
Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially near coastlines.
See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTM and ELEVATION to change elevations.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\0.00 to * | Geocomp Update or $50 | 333 |
Combine elevation of point and DTM.
Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z.
For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations.
The DTM only option replaces all elevations with interpolated DTM elevations, unlike DTMPTS which only sets the elevations of 2D points.
See also DTMMATH and ELEVOBJS.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\Combine with DTM | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Hatch linemarking.
Creates two parallel plines on either side of a pline or set, a closes the ends then hatches each closed pline. The offset is half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in same layer as the original line with the colour of the layer. The hatch is solid with spacing = 1.
If you use a solid linetype, the resultant line appears to be solid, at nominated width in ground units on the display, independent of view scale and smooth around bends.
The line will be plotted wider by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen.
One application is to show line marking.
The lines and gaps could be created by survey or by GCPLDICE.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Hatch\Along lines | Geocomp Update or $50 | 510 |
Report satellite horizon curtain.
Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval.
Useful for entry into GPS satellite visibility software.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Interpolate elevation from VAL.
For each selected point, find the chainage along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage, and modify the elevation of the point.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\From VAL | Geocomp Update or $25 | 77 |
Set start chainage for multiple HALs.
See also SETSTA and CHAINAGE/STATION.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 252 |
Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.
Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area.
The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.
| 21/05/12 | Reports\More...\Distance between sets | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Report on Geodimeter job file.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Change elevation of text to match subject.
Text objects have an elevation of 0.00 by default, even if created by labelling a point with text. Use GC77 to change the elevation of text to the elevation of the subject point. Now when you export to CAD the text will appear at the same height as the point.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Elevation\From subject | Geocomp Update or $25 | 92 |
Import profile into profile view.
Read a chainage, elevation .CSV file.
Alternatively, IMPORT the profile into the plan view then REVIEW.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Import profile | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Renumber points to same as point names.
If the names are alphanumeric, use SYSTEM to set Max Alpha Points high enough.
See also PTS2NAME.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Compare sum of lot areas against boundary.
Report the area of each selected set, and compares the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others.
In a subdivision, the area of the boundary lot should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 75 |
Report alignment.
Report coordinates along an alignment.
Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval.
The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end.
At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing.
The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Compute DTM areas by slope ranges within boundary.
Within selected boundary polygons, the planimetric (horizontal) and surface areas of the DTM, in plan units and percentage, within predefined slope ranges.
The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.
The slope ranges are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file.
This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16).
To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope.
See also DTMAREA, SLOPE, GC20 and GC44.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Areas by slope with boundaries | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Select objects less than or greater than specified length.
Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text.
Objects equal to the length are also selected.
The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-Mouse button Previous.
For example, to delete all plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-click and Previous.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Join multiple plines.
Join multiple consecutive plines if the ends match locations. See also JOIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Move points relative to alignment.
Move points towards or away from an alignment by a nominated amount.
Enter a positive offset distance to move the selected points away from the alignment, or negative to move towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved to the right of the alignment.
Use GC86 to move vertical walls by at least 2mm so they can be modelled.
Use GC36 to move points exactly onto the alignment.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.
See also ADDISO, GC54 and EARTHWORK.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create a DTM layer parallel to another DTM.
Create new DTM points at the specified distance parallel to the selected DTM.
The distances are measured perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Extend DTM to point.
Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle.
See also GC91.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Extend DTM by a horizontal distance.
Create points on a DTM layer at a nominated distance along the perpendicular bisectors from each point on the edge of the DTM.
The shortest distance from the new point to the existing DTM will be no more than the nominated distance.
The elevation on the new point is the average of the elevations extrapolated along the slopes of the two triangles adjacent to the DTM edge point.
The new points are assigned the name "Extend Bdy".
You may want to create a new DTM edge.
If the new point would fall inside the old DTM, it is not created.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More...\Extend by horizontal distance | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Report or move duplicate points.
For all selected points, report which points are within 1 mm horizontal distance and have different elevations, with the option to move those points apart.
As Terramodel forms any DTM, wherever there is more than one point with a horizontal proximity of approximately 0.001 ground units (metres or feet), one of those points is left on the DTM layer and the duplicates are relayered to layer 0.
If the layer contains string lines that should really be on separate layers, such as top and bottom of kerb, or the layer contains "triangles" created in an application with a proximity tolerance tighter than 1mm, you may not get the desired DTM surface. For this reason, anytime you import data that you intend to contour, from files such as DWG, GENIO or 12DA, you should run GC92 before first running any command that forms a DTM (such as CONTOUR , QPROFILE or TVLITE). If you notice the problem in your contours before running GC92, delete the data, reimport and run GC92 immediately.
The GC92 report shows which selected points have vertical elevation differences. Points which have separate layers, no elevation difference or are not contourable, will not affect the DTM. Where the report shows points which will affect the DTM significantly, and you can separate the points by properties such as colour, elevation, "of line" or name, you can use commands to move, delete, relayer or change elevations before forming a DTM.
You can also use GC92 to move duplicate points. Where the horizontal distance to a second point is less than 0.0011, the second point is moved in that direction to 0.0011.
If you select Repeat, the whole selection set is checked again and remaining duplicates are moved in a different direction this time.
You can restrict the movement to along sets such as kerbs.
You can include points with the same elevation in the report.
See also GC31 which relayers points on a layer that are within a configurable tolerance and GC86 which moves selected points relative to an alignment.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Duplicate points | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Mirror or rotate point labels.
For all selected points, mirror or rotate point labels.
The text on the mirrored point remains legible.
The text rotation can be set to any increment of 22.5°.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Rotate or mirror point labels | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Report crossfall between two 3D sets.
Report crossfall at xlines between two selected 3D sets.
The report optionally includes the chainage, offset and elevation of both sets.
You can also create points on the current layer at the intersection of the xlines and the sets.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Delete set segments greater than a nominated length.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Select points between two DTM layers.
Find those points above one DTM and below another, within the extent of both DTMs.
For each point in the new selection set, the colour is modified, the group is set to the next group number and the report shows the point number, easting, northing, elevation and the elevation of the two DTMs.
You can also select just one DTM.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create parallel sets at offsets.
Create sets parallel to an alignment using a table of offsets.
The points are created parallel to the main alignment of a selected roadjob at each xline within a chainage range.
You can specify up to nine strings on each side. For each string you can specify the horizontal and vertical offset, name and colour.
If the road job has a VAL, you have the option to add heights from the VAL.
On each side, you can add rotate the strings about the HAL and VAL by specifying a slope alignment.
The templates can be saved as project variables, or to a template .TEM file.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo\Streets\Parallel sets | Geocomp Update or $100 | 71 |
List registered horizontal alignments and select the active alignment or current road job.
List alignments registered in the HALMANAGER, by registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of alignment offsets and record name.
If there are any road jobs, you have the option to list the registered HAL number, registered alignment name , record number, number of alignment offsets and road job name of only alignments used in roadjobs. The current road job is marked with a *.
The highlighted alignment is the active alignment in the current roadjob, if previously set.
Once you have selected a registered horizontal alignment from the list, you have buttons to:
- Set the roadjob of the selected alignment as the current road job
- Pick a pline graphically, and select the HAL if it is registered
- Make visible only layers with names matching the roadjob name
- Set the active alignment
- Reform the design DTM after adding chords along arcs
- Re-reference all xlines to the selected alignment
- Clear the active alignment
- Exit the command
See also GCHALOFF to create a new pline alignment then make that active.
See also ACTIVE, where you need to know the current record number of the alignment, or to switch to the plan view then find the record graphically.
| 23/010/12 | Active alignment from registered HAL | Geocomp Update or $200 | 84 |
Prefix name with first four characters of layer name.
Change the name of selected objects to the first four characters of the layer name followed by the original object name.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna.
Adjust points that have been computed at a fixed height vertically below a target or receiver on a pole, when the pole was actually perpendicular to the surface.
Use GCADJANT to correct points collected by a GPS mounted on a vehicle when the height of the antenna above the surface was not allowed for during GPS installation.
For each point, the true antenna location is determined at the antenna height above the point. By projecting the antenna length from the true antenna location in a direction normal to the average slope of triangles touching the point, a new point is created uphill from the first point, optionally on a new layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or POA |
Adjust points for new vertical alignment.
Modify the elevations of selected points, by the difference between an old VAL and a new VAL.
Use this to update a design model derived from strings or a DTM, rather than templates
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Report and label angle-right between locations.
Report the angle-right given locations for backsight, instrument and foresight.
Optionally, label the angle with default text style.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Draw a pline or set arc from any three parameters.
Chose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Centre, End" or "3 Point".
ARC defaults to the last Type used.
Similar to ARC, except you can specify whether to create a pline or set.
The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.
If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Set\Arc or Draw\Arc\By 3 parameters | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.
Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.
The chords may be created invisibly.
The selected tolerance and invisibility become the defaults for this project.
The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.
Any objects named SETARCBL are deleted, then the new points and sets are named SETARCBL, and given the current colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.
The cut and fill slope values of the chords match the values of the arcs. If slope values have not been edited, the current default slopes from DESIGNSET are used as normal.
See also ARCBREAK which replaces the old arcs, ARCBL which does not allow for invisible chords, GCDTMALL which is equivalent to GCARCBL then DTMALL and BLFILTER which filters out excess breakline points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Delete or select text objects containing Bad Rec EAT codes.
Select or delete text records that contain Extended Attribute Text with Bad Record codes.
Bad records occur then the EAT code refers to an object by number that no longer exists.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create points at insertion point of blocks.
Create points at the insertion points of selected 3D blocks, on a specified layer. You have options to include 2D blocks, and to delete the blocks.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\At blocks | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Match extents of boundaries
For each of two DTM edges, copy the points from the other set which are outside the selected set on to the layer of the selected set, then create a new DTM edge.
The result is two new sets covering the same maximum horizontal extent of the two sets, but with different layers and elevations.
The areas and volumes between the new surfaces are shown in the message scroll area.
Use this to compute volumes between two surfaces where the model is assumed to batter from the extent of one DTM to the other.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $500 |
Import profile from file of chainage and elevation.
The input file needs to be comma-delimited in this format:
chainage,elevation
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file.
Create CL file for PPS Tunneling system from HAL, VAL, Xlines, and chainage range.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Create new DTM surfaces clipped at boundaries.
Use closed pline boundaries to create new surfaces from an existing surface, either inside or outside each polygon. The pline is also draped on the existing surface, the points and sets created are added to each new surface.
This command prepares surfaces for 3d and 4d modelling applications.
- Create plines clipping boundaries around design features or regions
- Uniquely name each boundary pline.
- Run GCCLIP
- Nominate the DTM Surface to be clipped
- Select the pline boundaries
- Select "Keep Inside" or "Keep Outside"
- New DTM surfaces are copied from the existing DTM, inside or outside the boundaries.
- The new layers have the boundary name suffixed with _IN and _OU.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative objects.
Modify the colours of selected objects according to three elevation ranges: negative, zero and positive.
GCCOLCON easily modifies the colour of labeled isopachs to show cut and fill.
2D objects are not modified.
Use HDMS, TVLITE or COLOURCON if you need to define more colour bands.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Colour +\- contours | Geocomp Update or $25 | 90 |
Change elevation of 2D points to match all other points in the set.
Used for fixing up supplied contour data.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 258 |
Import a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Import\Geocomp contour | Geocomp Update or $25 | 166 |
Export a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Export\Geocomp contour | Geocomp Update or $25 | 105 |
Set elevations of labelled contours.
Find contours on selected layer near selected text, and change the elevation of the contour pline to match the value of the text.
The text is considered near if the insertion point is within the specified tolerance of the ends of a pline, or within a tolerance equal to the height of the text from the nearest location on the pline.
Convert the plines to sets, and you have created an approximate DTM surface from a labelled 2D contour plan.
If the tolerance is too small, some contours will be missed. If you have only labels on index contours, and the tolerance is too large, some unlabelled contours will be assigned elevations.
By default, plines with elevations already are not changed. To force a change, tick "Do all".
Text containing non-numeric characters will be ignored.
If there are insufficient labels, the other contour elevations can be set manually using GCMULCON, GCONECON or PLTO3D. If there is a DTM, you could interpolate the contour elevations using ELVPLINE or regenerate the contours.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 258 |
Convert sets to plines and plines to sets.
Unlike CONVERT, GCCONVRT retains all attributes and is much faster with large data sets.
If all points in a set have the same elevation, the pline is assigned that elevation, otherwise the pline is assigned no elevation (= *).
Zero length plines are converted to points.
GCCONVRT does not remove duplicate points.
If you choose to delete the original sets, you can choose to delete the points in those sets.
GCCONVERT converts hidden and visible set segments.
The new objects may have the original or current layer name, and a prefix.
| 20/12/12 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 292 |
Coordinate transformation of points, plines, blocks and text.
Use either seven-parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method.
The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.
See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems.
GCCOORD as supplied by Geocomp Systems transforms is similar to COORDCON except that, as well as points, GCCOORD also converts sets, plines, blocks and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems.
GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using GCCOORD settings.
LLTABLE draws a table of coordinates including Latitudes and Longitudes.
GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas GCCOORD transforms points in Terramodel projects.
GCCOORD requires COGO module.
Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the \Shared\Mentor.dir.
If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601).
CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices.
| 01/09/11 | Cogo/Utilities/Coordinate conversion | Geocomp Update or $200 | GeoCalc |
Copy selected objects onto a selected layer, while retaining properties.
This is better than COPY if you are not moving the data, as COPY changes some properties such as colour to match the new layer.
Ideal for creating a single layer DTM from objects on multiple layers.
You have the option of selecting objects by layer list.
Colour, linetype, reference, group, visibility, hidden segments, etc., are retained.
If an object has colour = 0 (which means colour By Layer), you choose whether to retain colour = 0, or changed the colour of the layer from which the object is copied.
If points in a set are not selected with the set, the points are created on the new layer.
See also GCDTM and MultilayerDTM.
| 01/09/11 | Modify\Copy to layer | Geocomp Update or $25 | 178 |
Import and string comma-delimited ASCII (.csv) coordinate data.
Import CSV data in a common format used by GPS and other data loggers.
The data format is assumed to be Point,x,y,z,Description or Point,y,x,z,Descripton. Additional fields may be used for layers.
Choose the Easting/Northing order.
If you select a Geocomp Entity file, and your point names (descriptions) have been coded with corresponding feature and string codes, the points will be strung automatically. See GCIMPORT. If you don't select an ENT file during import, you can string later with AUTODRAFT.
You can change colours and linetypes according to a CLT mapping file. See GC16.
You can place blocks or symbols using a MAP file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.
You can derive the point Name from the Description using Long or Short Names from the ENT file, or retain the original Description.
Choose whether to place the points on the Current Layer or on Separate Layers.
If there are six or more fields in the CSV file, you will be prompted whether to "Use additional fields for Point's Layer". If you answer Yes, the sixth field will be used for the Layer. If you answer No and you have selected Separate Layers, both the Name and the Layer of each point will be combined from the Description and subsequent fields.
Select Original Point Numbers to use the first field, otherwise case let GCCSVIN assign new point numbers, for example if the first field has duplicates or blanks.
You can import other commas-separated coordinate files using commands such as GCPTSIN and IMPORT ASCII Points.
| 05/02/13 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Compute dam volumes.
Specify a DTM, a high water level, a low water level, a vertical increment and at least one boundary.
Select Water Vols for the volume of water in a depression, or Earth Vols for the volume of material in the wall.
The report shows, for each boundary, the incremental and cumulative volumes as limited by the DTM surface and the high and low water levels. **** indicates that the area is not changing.
You can graph these values in a spreadsheet program.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Dam volumes | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export cross sections at intersecting sets to DC file.
Create a roading .DC file from HAL/VAL or roadway from cross sections where Xlines intersect selected 3D sets.
This is useful with Trimble machine control, especially where your data is supplied as strings or if needs cleaning up in Terramodel.
See also GCMULTDC and IMPORT Roading DC files.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Export\Trimble DC from strings | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Delete sets and points in sets.
Delete selected sets including attached points, without having to select the points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 60+31 |
Label lots with dimensions.
Label multiple closed sets with bearings and distances on the current layer.
The labels are EAT text attached to the points, so the dimensions update as you move the points.
The text is created on the current layer, at the current plan view scale, with the nominated colour and text style.
You can therefore create multiple dimension text layers at different scales for use with different dynaview layerlists.
The lot with the largest area can be dimensioned as a surround lot.
The length suffix is selected from the list defined in UNITSSET Labelling.
See also GCLABLOT and LABELSEG.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\text\Lot dimensions | Geocomp Update or $100 | 75 |
Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .DTP file.
Set groups first by GCIMPORT.
Digital Terrain Parameter (.DTP) files are created by Geocomp during DTM formation.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 43 |
Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh.
For every layer that has at least three 3D contourable points, create arc breaklines, relink the DTM then refresh the display.
The arc breakline points and sets are created in the DTM layer using the current point and line colours.
The arc-to-chord tolerance and visibility of the chords are as previously set by GCARCBL.
See also DTMALL and DTMUPDT which do not change arc breaklines. DTMUPDT just updates one layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 289 |
Interpolate superelevation profiles from DTM.
See also SUPERPLOT, CHEKROAD, GCSUBGDE.
| 06/11/09 | POA |
Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor.
Report the interpolated elevation and elevation differences between up to three selected DTM layers at the cursor location to the message scroll area.
See also COORDS which enables the coordinate scroll including the elevation of the current DTM layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import a Geocomp .DTM file onto a layer.
A Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) is a self-contained file of coordinates, triangles and breaklines, from which Geocomp can extract contours and sections and compute volumes.
Creates a set from each triangle in the DTM file. The sets are created with a group of 1037 on a single nominated layer. The breaklines and boundary are included in the triangle edges.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Import\Geocomp DTM | Geocomp Update or $100 | FC D |
Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file.
Create a Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) from a DTM layer.
To export the whole DTM, do not select a boundary.
To clip the .DTM at an arbitrary pline boundary, you will need SiteDesign module.
The maximum number of DTM points in Geocomp 9 is 32,767 points and in Geocomp 10 is 99,999 points.
Triangles inside dead areas are ignored.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Export\Geocomp DTM | Geocomp Update or $100 | 43 or SDS-DXF |
Roadway volume report in columns.
Similar to EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES except the report is laid out in columns.
See also AVGEND.
If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $125 |
Edit feature attributes.
Edit or create feature attributes of an object.
Edit or create attributes of a selected parent object using a dialog.
Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time usingh the attribute definition file FEATURES.ADF.
You can also copy feature attributes from the parent object to multiple selected objects.
| 28/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $125 |
Modify the elevation of selected objects.
Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.
Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.
Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.
GCELEV is similar to ELEVATION but with a clearer dialog.
See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.
| 25/06/12 | Modify\Elevation\Elevation | Geocomp Update or $125 | 9 |
Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files.
Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC Digital Elevation Model grid files.
ESRI DEM files are gridded elevation models such as those from LIDAR and Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission CGIAR-CSI.
The ESRI DEM format defines the grid extent with a heading followed by the elevation values like this:
ncols 1100 nrows 1100 xllcorner 520950.0 yllcorner 5257950.0 cellsize 1.0 NODATA_value -9999 30.02 29.99 29.95 29.9 etc
You can limit the imported points to those inside a boundary pline. You can also define a corridor by specifying a maximum offset from a pline.
See also GCNEDIN for similar Quantm DEMs.
For ESRI Shape (SHP) files use the ESRI (SHP) IMPORT script.
For US Geological Survey DEM files use the USGS (dem) IMPORT script.
For x,y,z,intensity LIDAR data try LIDARIN or LIDARGRD.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Import\ESRI DEM | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Explode blocks, text, plines and tables, onto their layers while retaining elevations and names of the original objects.
Explode selected blocks into the contained blocks, plines or text, EAT text into plain text, plain text into plines, complex plines into segments and tables into text and plines, with the same layers as the exploded objects, while retaining the same names and elevations as the original objects.
Optionally, delete the old blocks or text.
Optionally, convert the exploded plines to sets.
GCEXPLOD may be aliased to GCEXPLODE.
If the block or text object has an elevation, the exploded pline retains the elevation. If a block is attached to a point, the elevation of that point is used.
Objects in Terramodel blocks do not contain layer or point information. Even if you create a block from sets on multiple layers, you will have plines on the one layer when you explode it.
Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks. Do not create recursive blocks that contain a block with same name.
Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links.
Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected.
See also EXPLODE which may be aliased to GCEXPLOD. EXPLODE explodes all selected blocks, text and complex linetypes onto the current layer, not the layers of the selected objects. EXPLODE explodes a label table created by LABELTABLE, whereas GCEXPLOD does not.
To separate pline or set segments, see DISJOIN.
| 01/09/11 | Edit\Explode | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Create a pline indicating fall from a location.
Create a pline showing the path of maximum slope down a DTM from a starting location. This approximates the path a liquid such as water might take.
The pline stops when it reaches the edge of the specified DTM, the bottom of a hole or the specified total length.
The pline is created on the current layer in the current line colour with the selected linetype.
Select a suitable linetype that indicates forward direction, such as 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>>, and a suitable plan view scale so you can see the symbols in the linetype.
To create a set along the same path, use DRAPE afterwards.
You can create paths from multiple locations before selecting Cancel to complete the command.
At flat spots or ridges with multiple possible paths, only one branch is created.
See also Hydrology module, LABGRADE, MG1, LINKSET and WALK.
| 22/03/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Filter excess points from straights and arcs 2D sets.
Filters sets in 2D by offset and radius tolerances.
Multiple arcs with common centres are also filtered.
GCFILTER is excellent for reducing the size of background maps to be uploaded to instruments.
See also BLFILTER, SETFILT and FILTER.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 127 |
Create points on a grid pattern.
Create points at nominated origin, interval, bearing and number within a boundary on a layer.
See also DTMGRID, GRIDEXPT, GRDPTS, GRIDELEV, GCLABGRD and GRIDMAKE.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label grid | Geocomp Update or $25 | 265 |
Import GPX GPS data.
Import points from a GPX file and transform from lat/long coordinates to a specified coordinate system.
You can limit to point inside a boundary or close to an alignment.
See also GPXOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 265 |
Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected grid cells.
The volumes are reported and text showing the values is created in each cell. The volumes are based on the surface triangles, not just the grid.
- Create grids/Regions
- Specify the colour and layer of closed abutting plines. These may be either rectangular grid cells or regions between xlines. A matrix of rectangular grids can be used to indicate local cut and fill over wide areas. Regions between xlines are used for more accurate cut and fill volumes over chainage ranges than by AVGEND for volumes by end-area. Create them on a unique layer.
- Settings
- Control report, text labels, styles and hatching.
- Compute Volumes
- Report the cut and fill volume for each selected grid cell/region between the two selected surfaces. Specify the regions/grids by layer. Optionally, specify an additional pline for an overall DTM boundary.
Place labels on different layers, so they can be selected and displayed easily.
Use vertical justification in the text styles to prevent overwriting.
Because cells can be any shape, and do not need to be generated by this command, the cells could be stockpile boundaries, for example. See also EARTHWORK
See also GRIDVOL which is much the same except it does not have the settings button and the xlines option.
See also GC20 which gives a detailed report of volumes within multiple boundaries.
See also MASSHAUL to create a mass haul diagram.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Grid volumes | Geocomp Update or $100 | 222 |
Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format.
Choose from HAL and VAL or Roadjob.
See also GSIDTMOU and GCPTSOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import alignment in Topcon/Civilcad GC7/GTS format.
Import horizontal alignment into the plan view, the vertical alignment into the profile view and the cross sections into the plan view.
The cross section points are strung according to descriptions in the cross section file.
The file names are assumed to have .GT7 file extension, and have the same name except for "- H", "- V" and "- XS" prefixes.
See also GCGTSOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export alignment in Topcon/Civilcad GTS format.
Export horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross sections extracted at xlines, to separate files.
See also GCGT7IN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets.
Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets from the nominated main HAL instead of the current alignment record.
Offsets are computed at the nominated interval so the adjusted alignment will initially follow approximately same path, but the adjusted alignment will now follow any edits to the main registered alignment.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Delete selected registered HALs.
Remove selected registered horizontal alignments from the HAL Manager.
The plines are not deleted.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically.
Edit the main horizontal alignment of a selected roadway graphically.
You can select, delete or insert IPs and change the arc radius, spiral in (back) and spiral out (ahead) lengths.
You can also report the offsets from the design alignment to an as-built set record.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Edit HAL | Geocomp Update or $100 | 84 |
Import Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).
The HAL file is imported as a pline in the plan view.
Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the HAL.
See also GCHALOUT and GCHVERIN.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Import Geocomp HAL | Geocomp Update or $25 | 253 |
Create a pline HAL from a registered horizontal alignment with offsets.
A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the horizontal alignment manager.
The IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.
A report is displayed showing each chainage, offset, easting and northing of each IP.
See also GCVALOFF and VARIOFF.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 157 |
Export Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).
Converts a pline HAL in the plan view consisting of straights, arcs or spirals, but not splines.
The output file name must be six-digits with extension .HAL, for Geocomp to read it.
To extract sections other than to edge of model at 10m intervals, change the interval and offsets in SDS 84.
See also GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 84 |
Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file.
Add a MASSIMPORT table of import or export material for MASSHAUL.
| Geocomp Update or $100 |
Report Geocomp Update version
Report Geocomp Update details.
Report
- Version numbers
- Serial/licence/dongle number
- The location of the tmodwin.ini file
- Terramodel Search Path
- Name and location of the prototype file
- The measurement units of the open project
There are also buttons to link to various help and document files.
See also ABOUT, SYSTEM, TSP and GC64BIT.
| 01/09/11 | Help\GCHelp | Geocomp Update |
Display chainage and offset from a selected active alignment in multiple views.
Select a pline or set in the plan view and a location in plan, profile, xsect or super view.
The pline or set is made the active alignment and the location of the cursor is displayed in all the views.
Click on Recentre Views to recentre open views at the current location.
If Update XSect view is selected, the cross section of the nearest xline is made the active chainage.
See also IDSTATION and SUPERVIS.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update |
Import Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) or use the Geocomp Data Collector Interface to import survey data.
Overview
GCIMPORT is installed with Terramodel supplied from Geocomp Systems. GCIMPORT can be launched using a Geocomp button on the toolbar or by typing GCIMPORT.
Using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface, raw data in a number of different data collector formats can be downloaded, converted to a Geocomp Standard Field File (.FLD), converted to Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) and then imported into Terramodel, with coding, stringing and symbols all automatically applied.
The Geocomp Data Collector Interface is being phased out because, in most cases, the raw data files (including FLD files) can be better imported using the Field Data Module.
Geocomp SDS format records the computed coordinates in a .PTS file and the feature code and stringing in a matching .STR file. The resulting 3D points are assigned block or symbol, layer, name and group according to the feature code. They are strung where required with sets of configurable layer, colour and linetype. Blocks representing tree canopies can be sized by the recorded radius.
See also the Geocomp import-related TMLs GC09, GCHALIN, GCVERIN, GCCONIN, GCDTMIN, GCPLTIN, GCPLFIN, GCCSVIN, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, PTJOIN and IMPORTGC.
The IMPORT .PTS/.STR dialog
Select "Import .Pts/.Str" button and browse to select a GEOCOMP .PTS file. If other files, such as STR (Strings), ANT (Annotations), DMN (Dimensions), LTO (Lots), HAL (Horizontal Alignments) or VER (Vertical Alignments) with the same name as the PTS file are in the same folder, they will also be imported.
This dialog also allows for selection of the ENT table. This table controls the layer names, descriptions/names, colours, linetypes and symbols according to the Geocomp entity number. If the Geocomp files have been derived from survey, the entity and stringing have been worked out from the feature coding.
The layer name can be the short description, long description or moss string code in the ENT file. The entity number may be added to the front of the layer name.
The record name (sometimes called description) is derived from the Geocomp string description, the short name (alpha-code), the long name or the moss (point or string) code in the ENT file.
The Group is derived from the Geocomp Entity.
Points are initially placed in layer 0. As the strings are imported, the points are relayered to the same layer as their sets. Points with no strings remain in layer 0. If "Copy Points into different layers if Point is in different Entities" is enabled, points used by more than one entity will be copied into each layer. Otherwise, the point will be placed only in the layer of the entity of the last string attached to that point.
If "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" is selected, blocks or symbols are automatically placed by group. The heading of Geocomp.MAP describes the format of the mapping file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.
A Geocomp plot parameter file can be used to control text attributes when importing DMN (Dimensions) and ANT (Annotations).
The colour of the points and sets is derived from the GEOCOMP.CLT file in the Terramodel Search Path. If the entity is not in GEOCOMP.CLT, the colours are derived from the colours of the existing layer. If the layer does not exist, it is created, and the colours of the new layer and objects come from the default layer. (See also GC16 which uses the CLT to set the colours without importing the objects).
Configuring the Data Collector Interface
The Geocomp Data Collector Interface is a DOS application called from Terramodel for Windows XP. It will not run on Window Vista or 7.
Geocomp users will pick it up quickly. For everyone else, we recommend the Field Data Module which uses IMPORT Scripts, RDE and AUTODRAFT. The Geocomp Update adds scripts for even more formats, including formats that are commonly used in Australia.
Sufficient environment space and free conventional memory must be made available.
ANSI must be loaded to download from any instrument other than a Geodimeter. See www.geocomp.com.au/support/geocomp/ansi.html .
The default location for these interface files is C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp.
If the software is
installed anywhere else, you will need to edit the TM.BAT and
the GEOCOMP.PAR files. Contact 
Geocomp Systems for more information if required.
You also need to select your data collector type, communication parameters and coding character positions. See the Geocomp manuals for an explanation of these settings.
Downloading from the Data Collector or Instrument to Terramodel
- Open a new project
- Run GCIMPORT
- Select Data Collector. This will launch the Data Collector Interface.
- From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't do this, you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
- Select 3, Data Collector Interface
- Select 2, Transfer from [currently configured data collector]
- Download the file from the data
collector. This creates a data file with a six-digit number
(with a file extension dependent on the data collector
format) in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp.
Alternatively, download the data using some other software (e.g. Terramodel Download Script, Geocomp, SokkiaComms, Leica Survey Office, Nikon TransIT or Geodimeter Software Tools) and copy the raw data into the C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp directory with a name six-digit number format.
If you get a black screen, you have an ANSI problem. See www.geocomp.com.au/support/geocomp/ansi.html . Windows Vista does not support this interface.
- Select 3, Create Standard Field
File. This is a raw data file in a standard Geocomp format.
If you need a control point file, create it in advance using GCPTSOUT and a target of Geocomp CRD. The .CRD file name is in the format CONTnn.CRD where nn are digits indicating the control point file number. The character positions of the station description in the name of the point are critical.
- Optionally, Select 8 to edit or view the .FLD file, or use any text editor.
- Select 4, Reduce Standard Field File. This creates a pair of Geocomp .PTS and .STR files. The .PTS file contains the coordinates and the .STR file contains the stringing and coding information.
- From the main Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 then Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.
- Select Import Survey Data in Terramodel to import the survey data into the current plan view.
Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface
- Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate data collector format as the Target. Save the coordinate file in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp. Use a six-digit name with an extension depending on the target.
- Run GCIMPORT
- Select Data Collector
- From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't change these values you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
- Select 3, Data Collector Interface
- Select 6, Transfer to [currently configured data collector]
- Upload the file to the data collector.
- From the Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.
Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using other uploading software such as Geodimeter Survey Tools or SokkiaComms.
- Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate Data Collector format as the Target, or use an alternative method appropriate to your uploading software.
- Upload the file according to your software instructions.
Communication between the Trimble Active Control Unit (ACU) or TSCE and Terramodel.
Refer to http://www.geocomp.com.au/support/terramodel/acu.html.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp 10 User's Guide Geocomp 10 Reference Manual Geocomp Feature Code Table The manuals for your total station or data collector The manuals for your instrument's file transfer software, if used |
File\Misc. Import\Geocomp PTS + STR | Without Data Collector Interface $250 With Data Collector Interface Geocomp Update or $1000 |
30 |
Create text from incrementing numbers.
Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified real number and increasing by a specified increment.
Great for house numbers.
You can set a prefix, suffix, current text style, direction and number of decimal places.
You can copy the style, including border style, from a sample text object you first create or edit using TEXT command.
See also INCRTEXT, RENUMLOT, LABELSETS, GCLABLOT and LOTJOIN.
| 02/02/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Replace circles with trees
Place a symbol or block for each selected circular set, scaled to match the diameter.
The most common use is to place large numbers of tree blocks scaled to fit canopy or trunk diameters.
Delete the original circles if you want.
For a few circles, UNITBLK or BLOCK Insert may be better.
If the circles are plines, CONVERT to a set first, then set the group with GC52 or SGRP.
The block is chosen according to the group of the set, and a mapping file. This is the same mapping file used by GCIMPORT and GC09. See Geocomp.map for an example which includes an explanation of the format.
GCIMPORT can import survey data including circles. If you elect not to "Map points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" at the time, you can use GCINSBLK to replace the circles later.
Use GC09 to place blocks or symbols on points by group. To create points at centroids of sets or plines, use GC35.
See also LABELSETS.
Tree canopy blocks included with Terramodel include: Tree1 to Tree8, Tree coniferous type 1, Tree deciduous type 1 to 3, GCSYM423, 437, 438, 452 and 453. Symbols 100 to 109 are provided as both symbols and blocks SYM100 to SYM109. Some of these are illustrated in the Terramodel 10.1 User Guide pages 171 and 200.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 93 |
Join points with gaps
Create sets on the current layer between selected points.
Join to nearest point starting from the west, or in point number order with option to only join consecutive points.
Leaves gaps where distance is greater than a specified maximum distance.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 15 |
Create sets from points by feature and string in name.
Create sets by joining points according to the feature code and string data in the name following the conventions of Geocomp software.
Join selected points with sets according to feature codes defined by sequential characters starting from the beginning of each name and immediately after any point code separator characters. The characters from the entity start position to the entity end position are treated as the feature code. The characters from the string start position to the string end position are treated as the string number.
Points and sets can be separated into layers or placed on the current layer.
If you specify a Geocomp ENT file, integer feature codes are matched against the entity field in the first column, and other feature codes are matched against the short description in the second column.
Colours and linetypes are determined by the layer settings, unless you specify an colour and linetype file (CLT) file (see GC16).
Blocks and symbols can be placed according to a MAP file (see GC09).
You can specify that the layer name is derived from the long description in column 7 of the ENT file.
GCJOINPT has been replaced by AUTODRAFT where a Feature Code is called a Field Code, a String Number is called a Feature Instance ID, points with Lines are strung even when the string number is blank, and the ENT, CLT and MAP files have been replaced by the ADC file.
See also GCIMPORT, PTJOIN, GCJOINMP and GCCSVIN.
| 07/03/13 | pcodes.pdf | Geocomp Update or $50 | 125 |
Import points from Google Earth (KML).
Import placemarks and paths from a Google Earth KML file within a selected boundary pline or within a maximum offset of a pline HAL.
The WGS84 latitude and longitude coordinates in the KML are transformed into eastings and northings in the coordinate system you select from a list defined by GCCOORD or COORDCON.
To extract a KML file from a KMZ, simply unzip using a utility like WinZip.
To import an image saved in Google Earth, use Terramodel IMAGE Manager.
| 16/01/12 | File\Misc. Import\Google Earth KML | Geocomp Update or $0 |
Link to Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.
Display aerial or satellite images of the selected location in Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.
Google Earth (GE)
Export selected points, sets and plines, launch Google Earth (if installed) then display the points and lines on the Google Earth model.
Specify whether to label points with the point number or point name or both.
Exported points are lines are given the same colours as displayed in Terramodel at the time.
There are Settings for "Absolute Elevation", "Extrude", "Text Scale" and "Line width".
In Google Earth, you can save the current image by selecting File, Save then Save Image, then manually register the image using Terramodel IMAGE Manager. Any changes you make to rotation, tilt, colour, style or visibility will appear in the saved image.
NearMap (NM)
Select "NM" to display an orthorectified image in NearMap with your default internet browser at the extents of the selected pline or set. The pline or set is not displayed.
HyperTiles (HT)
Select "HT" to open HyperTiles (if installed) then display orthorectified images at the polygon defined by the selected set or pline.
To save the images from HyperTiles:
- Change the coordinate system in HyperTiles from "WGS84 / Spherical Mercator" to match your coordinate system in Terramodel
- Turn on PhotoMaps
- Click on the disk icon
- Specify the name, path, resolution, etc.
- Save
HyperTiles saves files in a folder of the specified Name under the specified path including a .JPG file and .JGW file for each tile.
In Terramodel IMAGE Manager, add selected .JPG files to register them at the locations specified in the corresponding .JGW files. You can select multiple .JPG files at once.
If the list of coordinate systems in HyperTiles does not include your Coordinate System in Terramodel, use GCCOORD to transform a copy of your data to one that is listed.
Notes
- Click on Change CS to change the coordinate system to match your Terramodel data.
- The coordinate system used by GCKMLOUT is the same as the From system used by GCCOORD and COORDCON.
- If you are on an arbitrary coordinate system, transform the points onto a listed system, for example by GC3DADJ or GC07.
- The locations of the selected objects are exported as WGS84 latitudes and longitudes in the Keyhole Markup Language (.KML) format to suit Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.
- The image quality is only as good as the data source.
- You will need a broadband internet connection.
- Any "&" characters in the names of selected objects will be written to the KML file as "+".
| 1/2/13 | File\Misc. Import\Google Earth KML | Geocomp Update or $0 |
Label and draw grid in polygons.
Create a north-south/east-west grid of plines, labels, or both, within multiple bounding plotboxes of any shape.
Select a layer for the grid lines, or select No Grid. The grid can be lines, ticks or dots (short plines)
Select a layer for the labels, or layer 0 for no labels.
Select easting and northing intervals.
If you are labelling, select text styles and whether to label inside or outside the plotbox. You can also prefix and suffix the labels and control the number of spaces from the border. The initial default suffix is derived from the plan view settings.
Gridlines can cross a polygon up to 20 times.
LABELGRID is simpler but only allows for simple rectangular plot boxes, unlike those often created by PLANSET.
You can also make a pline grid with GRIDMAKE or PLANSET.
To make a grid of points, see GCGENGRD, GRIDMAKE and GRIDELEV.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 | 93 |
Label intersection points.
Label all intersection points on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, and optionally Delta, Easting and Northing.
Chainages are labelled with "Ch".
The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically.
See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 84 |
Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text.
Label selected closed sets with EAT text showing the lot numbers and lot area.
The lot numbers are derived from the set names.
The areas up to 10,000 square units are labelled as m². Alternative areas above 10,000 square units are divided by 10,000 and labelled as Ha.
The precision of the basic and alternative areas is controlled by UNITSSET.
If you want feet and acres or other area unit labels, or you don't want to use EAT text, use LABELSETS instead.
You can use commands such as LABELSETS, LOTJOIN, NAME, QSET and RENUMLOT to set the lot numbers as set names.
See also GCDIMLOT which labels dimensions using EAT text and GC80 which reports lot areas.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Text\Lot numbers | Geocomp Update or $25 | 91 |
Label points in a set with pipeline peg labels.
Create text labels at a specified offset from all points in a selected set, showing the word PEG followed by the point name and chainage.
Tick boxes enable extra labels for delta angle (to minutes or seconds) and coordinates.
Use PROJECTV to control the left/right direction.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border.
Label points with user-definable text labels at an offset perpendicular to a HAL on a specified layer with rounded rectangle borders and leader lines.
Enter the text and text style in the Settings.
The text can include EAT codes referring to the points. Use \n to indicate new lines of text.
See also CALLOUT to label one point at a time with more options.
For points on a HAL, you can create a temporary HAL to control the side on which to place the labels.
| 27/09/12 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
List points with invalid coordinates.
List points with an undefined easting or northing or both. Points with only undefined elevations (2D points) are not listed.
The report also lists the first available point number, the last point number and the maximum and minimum non-zero values for easting, northing or elevation, if any.
Points with undefined coordinates are most commonly created when RDE cannot compute the coordinates from the available survey information. Such points, and sets connecting them, are not visible but are included in lists when selected by non-graphical means, such as by View or Point number range.
See also GCNOELEV.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Export Quantm linear features .LFA
Quantm uses a linear_features.lfa file to define crossing requirements at linear features.
The set name defines the linear feature description and the layer name defines the linear feature label.
Sets must have all 3D points or all 2D points. If you have some 2D points in the set, assign elevations first, for example by DTMPTS or GC50. If a set has all 2D points, Quantm will interpolate from the DTM.
Export special zones using GCSZAOUT.
Export DTM data using GCTMAOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $POA |
Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.
Create labelled plines representing latitude and longitude according to the selected Coordinate System.
Settings
The settings provide control over the pline spacing and labelling.
- Labels...
-
- Interval
- Enter the grid line step. The default step interval is 1. For example, enter a value of 3 to label every third grid line.
- Offset
- Enter the distance in sheet units for the label offset from the edge of the pline box. The default value is 0.5 cm.
- Decimals
- Enter the number of decimal places for labels. If the seconds are not selected, this value is used for minutes. If minutes are not selected, degrees. For example, to label in the form DDD MM SS.ss, include seconds in Label Components, and enter a value of 2 seconds. For the form DDD MM.dddd, untick seconds and enter 3 decimal places. For DDD.dddd, untick seconds and minutes and enter 4 decimals.
- Textstyle
- Select the text style for latitude and Longitude labels. If labels appear to be missing, they may simply be too small or too large. If labels cross the pline box, you may want to edit them.
- Label Components
- Enter any required prefix or suffix. For example, for a degree sign symbol, enter "\176". For Southern latitudes, use "-" prefix or "S" suffix.
- Grids...
-
- Grid interval
- Enter the grid interval in seconds of arc. The default interval is 10. For Longitude, one second of arc is approximately 30.9 metres. For Latitude, one second of arc varies from approximately 30.9 metres at the equator to 0 at the poles.
- Resolution
- Enter the number of pline control points per grid interval. More vertices better approximate the true curve but take longer to compute. For example, with an interval of ten seconds of arc, for a pline segment every two seconds, enter a resolution of five.
- Import/Export
- Save the label grid settings to transfer between projects. The same settings are also used by GCCOORD, LLTABLE and LLGRID.
To label grids in multiple boundaries, enter GCLLGRID M at the command line.
| 01/09/11 | HDMS\Coordinate\Draw latitude and longitude grid | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Import Geocomp long section .LNG
Import long section as a pline in the profile view
See also GCVERIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 412 |
Label lot corners with two elevations
Label points in selected sets with a single text object showing elevations from both an existing DTM and a design DTM
For each point, the text is oriented along the longest of the two connecting segments on the first lot tested.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
List the coordinates of selected points to report or CSV.
Select Points then List.
Select Options to include any permutation of Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number, Group and General Information and whether to also export to a comma-separated CSV file.
See also LPOINTS which does not include options for Group or CSV, LPTSRAD which also shows bearing and distance from a stand point and PORTSC1 which reports heights as depths.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\List [Points] | Geocomp Update or $25 | 26 |
Assign unique layers for export to DXF.
Relayer selected objects to new layer names with unique sequential numbers for each object or layer name and create a corresponding map file.
To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:
- SAVEAS the project so you have a backup.
- GCMAPOUT to relayer selected objects onto layers with sequential names beginning with GC_GG and export a corresponding mapping file.
- Export objects to a .DXF file in Release 2000 format.
- DXFCHANG to create a new DXF file with layer names corresponding to the original object names according to the map file.
For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.
| 07/03/13 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Close gaps in contours.
Create new contour segments across the gaps. Then JOIN to create contiguous contours.
Use GCMATCH to match contours at sheet edges and cross gaps at labels.
Also match sets within a tolerance.
See also DTMMATCH which matches overlapping DTMs.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import a list of road materials.
Add to or modify the materials in the the Road Material Manager MATERIALS. The list is exported by GCMATOUT to transfer materials from one project to another.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export a list of road materials.
Export a list of materials from the Road Material Manager MATERIALS.
Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither.
Import into another project using GCMATIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Merge multiple regions or DTMs.
Create a final layer by merging multiple regions from layers in a sequential layer list.
The objects on the Initial DTM layer are first copied to the Final DTM layer. Then, for each layer in a layer list in turn, objects in the Final DTM are clipped to boundaries on the listed layer then all the objects from the listed layer are copied into the Final DTM layer. Breaklines are also draped onto the Final DTM 2 mm inside the clipping boundaries. The process is repeated in alphabetical order for each layer in the layer list.
The clipping boundaries are at the "Clip Dist" outside the region boundaries. Make the Clip Dist greater than 3 mm to reduce potential crossing breakline problems.
Specify whether the region boundaries on each listed layer are defined by every closed set, or the DTM Edge. If DTM Edge is selected, boundaries are only created for layers which can form a valid DTM.
GCMERGE can be used to merge multiple surveys or design components into big models.
If you use GCMERGE to build an-end-of-month DTM, be careful with the spelling of layer names so the alphabetical order is also the data order. For example, EOM 09 20090822A.
See also MERGE, GCMATCH and GC33.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Import multiple .PTS or CSV files.
Import multiple ASCII coordinate files in common formats.
- Specify whether the files is space-separated .PTS or comma-separated .CSV.
- Select a data order from this list: E N Z, N E Z, P E N Z, P N E Z, P E N Z D, P N E Z D, E N Z D or N E Z D.
- Next
- Browse to select a file to import. If the file extension is not .PTS or .CSV you can select from All files.
- Click next again to import another file of the same format
- Click Cancel when you have completed importing all the files.
Lines with unexpected data, such as blank fields, letters or spaces, header lines, * for elevations on are skipped.
Deep negative elevations are read as 2D.
See also GCPTSIN, IMPORT, GCCSVIN and so on.
| 01/09/11 | in-built help | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Assign contour elevations to multiple 2D plines.
To use GCMULCON:
- Set the contour interval using CONTOURSET
- Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer
- Run GCMULCON
- Pick the layer with the contour plines
- Pick a starting contour height
- Pick two locations to define a line across multiple contour plines
- The command computes two possible elevations for the last contour, one for uphill and one for downhill.
- Apply one of the two end elevations to all the selected contour plines
GCMULCON correctly allows for the line to cross the same contour multiple times.
This is similar to LABELCONTOURS, except the elevations are assigned rather than read.
See also GCONECON, GCCONTXT, GCMATCH and PLTO3D.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 258 |
Export sets to a Trimble Roading DC file.
Create a roading .DC file of alignments for every selected 3D set.
See also GCDCOUT and IMPORT Roading DC files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files.
Create one .RLN file for each set containing horizontal and vertical alignment only.
Useful for uploading strings for setout.
See also GCRLNOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export multiple alignments to a Leica 1200 LandXML file
Create an .xml file of alignments for every selected 3D set.
See also GCXMLOUT and IMPORT LandXML files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Compute cut/fill volumes between pairs of DTM surfaces.
Compute cut and fill volumes within boundaries between DTM surfaces listed in a table.
The volumes are computed between each sequential pair of DTM or depth surfaces.
The selected boundary may represent mining "blocks".
Optionally create CSV file.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Name points sequentially along a set.
Rename points along a set from a starting integer with optional prefix and suffix.
See also GCRENUM.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import Quantm grid data.
Import Grid (NED) .asc data created by Quantm.
GCESRIIN imports similar data files created by other applications.
See also GCTMAIN.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Import NMEA log data.
Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers tagged as $GPGGA’.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Select all points with no elevation.
Select all 2D points from selected points. 2D points have an elevation of *.
Use the Previous selection to use these points in another command such as DTMPTS.
GC69 turns points with elevation = 0 into 2D points with elevation = *.
GC53 retains the elevation on the point but excludes the point from any DTM surface.
GCLINPTS lists points with no easting or no northing.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Select 2D points | Geocomp Update or $25 | 88 |
Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.
Pick the set, offset, elevation difference and side.
See also OFFELEV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 71 |
Select all points in selected sets.
Select all points in selected sets.
Use the Previous selection to use these points in another command.
This is similar to selecting points by Ofline in the Right Mouse Button menu, only GCOFLINE allows selection of multiple sets.
See also BDYRELAY.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Select points of line | Geocomp Update or $25 | 60 |
Assign elevations to selected contour plines.
See also GCMULCON, GCCONTXT and PLTO3D.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 258 |
Export data to Geocomp .PTS and .STR format.
Geocomp SDS data consists of at least two files with the same name and certain file extensions. The name must be a six-digit integer for Geocomp to read them.
- Points
- The points file (.PTS) contains the easting, northing, elevation and a standpoint number. The standpoint is 0 when exported from Terramodel. If point has no elevation in Terramodel, the elevation is -9999 in the PTS file, which means no elevation. The point number is derived from the line number.
- Strings
- The string file (.STR) contains the stringing for those points. The STR file is automatically created with the .PTS file of the same name. Each string has a description (see below) and an entity (see below). The string number is the line number in the string file.
- Annotation
- The annotation file (.ANT) contains text. This file is only created when text is selected and not exploded. EAT codes in text are replaced with the value. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and new line by two spaces.
- Description
- The description is the first 20 characters of the name. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and , by ;.
- Entity
- Geocomp data is divided into entities ranging from 1 to 999.
To set the entities, chose from:
- Match record name with short entity name
- Match record name with moss code
- Match record name with long entity name
- Use group number of record
- Decode the layer name from the first few characters (e.g. get entity 102 from layer 102_TOP.)
You can choose whether you want to explode blocks, linetypes or text.
The maximum number of points or strings that Geocomp 9.x can read is approximately 32,000. For Geocomp 10.08 and 10.1, the maximum is approximately 132,000.
Other Geocomp data types that can be exported include:
| Cross sections | CES | See EXPORTGC and GC37 |
| Contours | CON | See GCCONOUT |
| Digital Terrain Models | DTM | See GCDTMOUT |
| Horizontal alignments | HAL | See GCHALOUT |
| Vertical Alignments | VER | See GCVEROUT |
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Export\Geocomp PTS + STR | Geocomp Update or $25 | 68 |
Place building pads at nominated elevation within a lot.
Create a new set on the current layer, offset from the lot boundary by 0.005 with points at the specified elevation.
Select a free location anywhere inside a lot. Define a standard offset and either a Relative or Absolute Elevation. If an existing set is already offset, then only the Elevation Relative or Absolute values need to be applied.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 283 |
Pan by keypad with North = 8.
Pan to the adjacent screen in the direction of the numeric keypad.
As shown in the following table, type in GCPAN, a space and a numeric keypad button indicating the direction.
NW = GCPAN 7 |
N = GCPAN 8 |
NE = GCPAN 9 |
|||||
W = GCPAN 4 |
E = GCPAN 6 |
||||||
SW = GCPAN 1 |
S = GCPAN 2 |
SE = GCPAN 3 |
|||||
| If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, Shift-MiddleMouseClick, or select PAN, RECENTER, GC34 or the VPAN toolbox in the Geocomp workspace. | |||||||
|
|||||||
Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points.
Create points to setout concrete roadway panels given a panel alignment, start chainage, panel gap and hole edge distance.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $500 |
Create a CSV file of pavement depths in a format suitable for use in Paveset paving machines.
Specify a roadway, pavement depth, as-built layer, chainage range, offsets (in m) and export CSV file name.
The CSV file includes at the specified offsets, for every xline, the chainage and the difference in mm between design elevations interpolated from the road design and as-built elevations interpolated from the as-built DTM layer.
The optional report also shows the road name and description, layer depth, design elevation and as-built elevations.
If elevations cannot be interpolated from both surfaces at any offset, the output files are deleted with a warning.
You may need to use GC91 or similar to extend the surfaces beyond the as-built points to ensure that elevations can be interpolated. The xlines at the reported offsets should be at the as-built points. The specified chainage range should not exceed the as-built surface.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Create pile points along an alignment.
Create points for each pile given alignments, chainage range, spacing, offsets, elevation and pile numbers.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 340 |
Create plines for line marking.
Create new plines on the current layer, along selected plines, with a nominated line length and gap.
To add "thickness", use GC71.
If the plines to be selected include splines or spirals, use FILTER on a copy first.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import HP-GL or HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file into sheet view.
Import and edit plot files in HP-GL and HP-GL/2 format then plot to any Windows plotter.
This is useful when your Windows plotter doesn't support HP-GL or HP-GL/2/2, but you have a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plot file from Geocomp or other software.
Supported plotter commands include:
- Lines
- PD, PU, PA, PR
- Pen numbers
- SP
- End of page
- PG, NR, Esc%01A
- Arcs
- AA
- Text labels
- LB, LO, SI, SL, DI
- Page size
- PS
These commands make up the bulk of HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plot files which have not been polyline-encoded. PE commands produced by applications including Terramodel are ignored.
PC and PW commands are ignored. Instead specify colour mapping during import. Use the Terramodel pen carousel to define the pen thickness and colour for each pen.
The plot is placed in the current layer in the sheet view in at the specified location.
Dimensions are in sheet units.
Text labels use TMODELF font. You can change these after import using TEXTMETRICS.
Notes for PDF2CAD users:
- In PDF2CAD, Options select HP-GL/2 CAD format
- In GCPLFIN,
- Browse for file, selecting HPG file as the file type.
- Everything is imported as plines.
- Map CAD colours to Terramodel colours during import.
Notes for Geocomp users:
- To import Geocomp .PLT files, see GCPLTIN.
- Use GCPLFIN rather than GCPLTIN, to closely approximate Geocomp plots.
- Create a PLF from your PLT with SDS 94, RDP 494, or PU4.
- Linework and symbols are converted to plines.
- If the first character in the Geocomp .CMD file is *, text is retained as labels, otherwise text is exploded to plines.
- While Geocomp can be configured to output PLF files to suit almost any vector plotter, GCPLFIN is optimised to import PLF files in HP-GL format.
- If you specify the Geocomp pen number to equal the Terramodel colour number, and map the colour number to equal the Terramodel pen number, the selected Terramodel pen carousel will use the same pen numbers as the Geocomp plot.
To use Terramodel as a Windows plotter for Geocomp:
-
In Geocomp
- Copy GCPLFIN.CMD from C:\Program Files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp to C:\GC10\CFG as OTHER.CMD
- Configure Geocomp to use OTHER plotter format
- Create a PLT, for example using Geocomp command SDS 93
- "Send plotter instructions to disk file" using Geocomp command SDS 94 or PU 4.
-
In Terramodel
- Configure a carousel
- Add a plotter configuration for your Windows plotter and carousel
- Create a new Terramodel project
- Open the Sheet view
- Set a suitable current layer
- Run GCPLFIN command
- Edit the plot if required.
- Plot at 1:1 scale to your Windows plotter (unless you want to scale it).
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Import\Geocomp HP-GL/2 PLF | Geocomp Update or $125 |
Import Geocomp .PLT plot file into sheet view.
The Geocomp PLT file format is unique to Geocomp. The font, character height, character width, label origin, orientation and slant are set in the PLT using the entity definition in the Geocomp plot parameter file.
You can modify text by commands including TEXTMETRICS, TEXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN, TEXTCASE, TEXTFIT and ALIGNTXT.
- Layer
- Layers are determined by the entity of the record and the selected Geocomp entity file.
- Font
- The Geocomp font is substituted by the Terramodel font used in the text style nominated for that font. Some suggested equivalents:
Geocomp font Terramodel font 0 iso3098b, tmodelp 5 tc-romns 10 tmodelf, tc-mono 98 subdiv 99 iso3098b, tmodelp - Character height
- The character height is derived directly from the character height in the PLT file text record.
- Aspect ratio and text width.
- The aspect ratio in Terramodel is the character width in the PLT file multiplied by the width factor divided by the character height in the Geocomp PLT file [Aspect ratio = width * factor / height]. The width of a text record is dependent on the Terramodel font, character width, width factor and characters used. Leave the width factor as 1.0 unless you want to consistently stretch or compress text from a certain font.
- Colours
- Select Terramodel colour numbers to substitute for Geocomp pen numbers 1 to 20. Use PLOTSET, PLOTTERSET and CAROUSEL to control the colours and thicknesses on paper. Use PALETTE to control the display colours.
- Linetype
- Numbered Geocomp linetypes are substituted by linetypes of the same name, otherwise Solid is used. These linetypes can be loaded from GC9.LIN.
- Symbols and blocks
- Geocomp symbols are substituted with the closest equivalent Terramodel point symbol, unless "Use Terramodel blocks instead of point symbols" is enabled, in which case the matching Geocomp symbol block is used. For example, Geocomp symbol 68 (+) is labelled with point symbol 34 or block GCSYM068.
- File format
- To import HP-GL/2 files, see GCPLFIN. Use GCPLTIN rather than GCPLFIN, if you don't want to explode linetypes and text.
| 01/09/11 | File\Misc. Import\Geocomp Plot PLT | Geocomp Update or $125 | FC D |
Edit profile IPs graphically.
Edit an Intersection Point from a vertical alignment profile in the profile view.
Choose an editing mode such as Drag.
You can set maximum, minimum and increment for grades and whether to display.
See also CURVE to edit the curve details at an IP and RDVALEDIT to use design speed criteria.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Edit VAL | Geocomp Update or $250 | 412 |
Create profiles from multiple DTMs in a layerlist.
Create profiles along multiple HALs interpolated from DTMs in a layer list.
Each profile is created in the profile view referenced to its HAL.
The pline colour is derived from the DTM layer colour, the linetype from the DTM linetype and both the name and layer name from the DTM layer name.
The pline vertices are created at the DTM break points. The profiles are broken at the edge of the DTM and within dead areas.
You can delete profiles previously created from the same HALs.
See also PROFILE and QPROFILE which use layer masks.
| 01/09/11 | DTM\More..\Profiles from layerlist | Geocomp Update or $250 | 235 |
Import data from TPSetout/TPStakeout .PTA survey point file.
See also TPSETOUT for exporting to TPSetout and TPSTKOUT for exporting to TPStakeout.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Check minimum distances between points on sets.
Report record number, layer name and point numbers for each segment.
Indicates with **** whether any segment is less than a specified maximum distance.
Report average distance between points for each set and overall.
Use GCPTSDIST to prove that you have taken sufficient observations in surveys of linear features such as roads.
Use GC68 to interpolate points at a minimum distance.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import points from an ASCII file.
Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.
The formats include:
- Agtek
- Civilsoft (1 and 2)
- Geopak
- Lewis and Lewis
- Lietz SDRMap
- LisCAD
- TDS
- Wildsoft
- Lat-Long
- Geocomp Control Points (.CRD)
- Geocomp Field File coordinates .(FLD)
- Trimble E N D
- Carlson RW5
- Trimble Recon LM80 (.TXT)
- Desc East North Elevation
- Leica .CST
- ASCII GPS .ASC
- Leica GSI16 GPS
- Geodimeter Area
- LandXML
PTSIN imports only some of these formats.
See also IMPORT which imports many formats, GCPTSOUT and PTSOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Output points to an ASCII file.
Select from a range of coordinate survey point formats for uploading into survey instruments for setout.
- CivilSoft 1 and 2
- Geopak
- Lewis and Lewis
- Lietz SDRMap
- LisCAD
- TDS ASCII
- Wildsoft
- Leica with 8 character descriptions .GRE
- Leica with 8 character descriptions .GSI
- Leica with 16 character descriptions .GSI
- Sokkia SDR2x
- Sokkia SDR33
- Geodimeter Area .ARE
- Nikon 700 series Upload
- Geocomp Field .FLD
- Geocomp Control Point .CRD
- Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT
- Leica 1200 LandXML
- Trimble Recon LM80
The Job name field is currently only used with Sokkia formats.
Some of the formats have been modified slightly compared with the similar PTSOUT, such as adopting Easting/Northing order.
Points with undefined (*) easting or northing, are not exported. Points with undefined elevation (2D points), may be exported depending on the format. With some formats, you can choose whether to export the point number or the point name.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 188 |
Change elevation or name of points on layer by the nearest selected text within tolerance.
Change the elevations or names of points imported from 2D CAD drawings where the points are labelled with text objects.
Select the text objects, a points layer and a tolerance.
Select whether to replace all elevations or names, or just those which don't already have elevations or names.
Select whether to delete text objects for those points which have been changed.
Select whether to replace the point elevations or the point names.
Select whether the tolerance is to be measured from the points to the insertion points of the text or to the centroids of the text boxes.
If you don't have points, use TEXT2PNT to create points at the insertion point of the text.
| 22/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM.
Compare points in a survey against a design DTM.
The report shows the chainage, offset, design DTM elevation (=rl), point elevation (=fl) and elevation difference (dz) for each selected point.
You have the option to ignore points outside the DTM extent and specify a stripping depth.
The chainage and offset is computed relative to the active alignment.
See also GC30.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Interactive quick profile.
Display a profile interpolated from a DTM layer between two locations in the Plan view.
The second location can be dragged by mouse. In Shift mode, the first location is moved with it. In Rotate mode, the first location is fixed.
The quick profile is displayed in the Xsect view, but no object is created.
See also QPROFILE which is not interactive, but allows for multiple layers.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume.
Move a selected point of intersection along a horizontal alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.
QV Options
- ROAD
- Terramodel will display the current road in this control. If you have more than one road in your project file, open the drop-down list box to select a different road.
- ALIGN
- Select the HAL whose alignment you want to modify from this locate control.
- LOC
- Enter the IP you want to relocate in this point control. Selecting the HAL along a curve or tangent causes Terramodel to locate the closest point of intersection to the location you picked.
- CALC
- This command button calculates the new cut and fill quantities from the modified HAL, the original vertical alignment, and the stored templates and displays it in the Message scroll.
Tips on using GCQV:
- You must have used the ROADS module to store a road job, shapes, templates, horizontal alignment and vertical alignment in your Terramodel project file before executing GCQV.
- Execute Undo after each IP modification to return the alignment to its previous form.
- GCQV is an improved version of QV.
| 01/09/11 | RG 1244 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Redraw all views and set scale for point labels.
Redraw all view modes.
If the current view is the Plan view, the plan view scale is also set so that point labels are a consistent, small but legible height.
GCREDRAW is similar to the VIEWSCAL Default for Pt Labels button followed by REDRAW.
| 01/09/11 | View\Redraw for labels | Geocomp Update or $100 | 132 |
Renumber points in set order.
Sequentially renumber points in selected sets, starting at the highest point number in the project plus one.
See also RENUM, RENUMBER, REVERSE and GCNAMEPT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 129 |
Start a new report in P3Pad editor.
Start a new report in P3Pad editor by clearing any current report or opening a new P3Pad report window.
Any new report created by a Terramodel command, will replace any currently open report. To keep a report, select File from the P3Pad menu then Save As...
Editor features include Text formatting, Print Preview, Find and Replace, Insert Date and Time and Embed or Insert objects such as images.
The P3Pad report editor can be used to edit Terramodel reports, or write new text. The reports can be Saved and Opened in Text or Rich Text (RTF) formats. Use TXT format to reuse in software such as TEXT or TXTIN.
Changes to page setup, typeface or font size for new reports take effect only after you restart the report editor. Use a font such as Courier New which is fixed width and displays m² correctly.
If you want to use a different editor, simply copy the text and paste into that other editor such as WORDPAD or NOTEPAD.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 201 |
Move or copy objects from one view to another.
The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.
The objects are removed from the original view, unless you do not "Delete Old".
Examples
- Review a point from Plan to XSect
- A point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.
- Import profile
- If you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,Elevation" you could IMPORTinto the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.
- Rotate a copy in 3D
- Review objects from the Plan view to View 8, without deleting them. Then use GC3DROT to rotate the copied objects.
See also REVIEW which always deletes the objects from the original view.
| 01/09/11 | RG 1246 | Modify/ReView | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river.
Where a 2D "river" crosses contour plines, points are created with the contour elevation. A set is then created along the river string with heights interpolated along the string.
This improves the terrain model. For best results, remove flat triangles in link settings.
See also GC50.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 185 |
Create Geodimeter Roadline3D Files from sets
Cross sections are created by intersecting sets at Xlines along the alignment.
The HAL, VAL, "roadway templates", and "side templates" are exported to an .RLN file suitable for uploading to Geodimeter Program 39 using Geodimeter Software Tools or the Upload Script.
Selecting "Use names" includes names in the .RLN file. Select "Limit 12 Pts" if uploading, as only 12 points can be uploaded for each side template. Alternatively, if the file is to be imported using the Import script for editing as a Terramodel Roadway, the limit is not required.
The details of each computed point are reported.
See also P39 and See also GCMULTGD.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Export alignment in Sokkia SDR format.
Use a Roadjob, HAL/VAL or intersect 3D sets.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes.
Replace skip ranges from skips defined in a CSV file or by pline boxes.
Use GCSKIPMN when you have too many skip ranges to manage by manual editing with SKIP.
You can add or replace skip ranges from a file which you have previously created in a spreadsheet application.
You can also create pline boxes at the current skip ranges in both the plan and profile views, centred on the road alignment. After editing these boxes for position and range and updating the alignments, Create Skips from selected boxes.
Options
- Roadjob
- Select the roadjob
- Sort
- Sort the skip ranges in chainage order
- Report
- Report the skip ranges
- Import
- Import skip ranges from a CSV file with start chainage, end chainage, skip name
- Box Width
- Specify a width in m for pline box
- Create boxes
- Create pline boxes at skips
- Create skips
- Create skips at selected pline boxes
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Create points at strata from table of materials and depths.
Create multiple points with the same coordinates as selected points, with layer names and elevations derived from a CSV file.
To use GCSTRATA
- Relayer the points according zones of typical strata as suggested by a geologist.
- Create a CSV file with rows for new layers and columns of depths for each zone.
- Run GCSTRATA.
- Select the points.
- Choose whether to compute elevations or depths.
- Select the CSV file.
- Choose whether to delete the original points.
- Create a new point with a new elevation on the layer in the left column for each point with layer name matching the first row.
For example, using this table, and selecting depths, for each point on layer B4, create a point on each of the six listed layers with the same easting and northing. The elevation of the new point on layer 1_topsoil is 0.1, on layer 2_alluvium is 0.3, etc.
Layer, A, B1, B2, B3, B4, 1_topsoil, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 0.1, 2_alluvium, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 2.5, 0.3, 3_colluvium, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 2.5, 0.5, 4_RS, 4.8, 2.3, 3.7, 4.7, 1.5, 5_XW, 12.8, 3.6, 12.8, 9.1, 4.1, 6_MW, 13.6, 20, 22.7, 20.1, 28,
If the points are to be used for depth surfaces, select depths so the Z value is derived from the table. If for elevation surfaces, the value in the table is subtracted from the elevation of the original point.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.
See also CHEKROAD and GCDTMGDE.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Export Quantm special zones .SZA
Quantm allows you to specify zones that require special treatment such as cost and crossing requirements.
Select zones by closed plines or sets (or blocks containing closed plines or sets) to export to the special_zones.sza file.
The name of the pline or set (or subject of the block) defines the zone description. The layer name defines the zone label.
Export linear features using GCLFAOUT.
Export terrain data using GCTMAOUT.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Label batter with block showing direction of slope.
User-definable "tadpole" blocks are placed between two sets representing tops and toes at the nominated spacing.
Each block is placed so it points downhill from the higher set to the lower set. The sets can therefore swap direction between tops and toes at the transition between cut and fill.
The block size increases with the horizontal distance. Blocks which exceed the maximum length are not placed.
If you create your own "tadpole" block, place the insertion point at the uphill (south) end.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import Quantm terrain data.
Use this to verify your TMA file before submitting it to Quantm.
Use MOSSIN to transfer proposed alignments from Quantm to Terramodel.
See GCTMAOUT.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Export Quantm terrain data.
Create a .TMA file for submission to the Quantm route optimization for infrastructure service. The TMA file is a grid of points interpolated from a DTM within a boundary.
Check your .TMA file by reimporting it using GCTMAIN.
Export Special Zones using GCSZAOUT.
Export Linear Features using GCLFAOUT.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Define a region by tracing inside multiple selected plines or sets.
Show the extent of the region within multiple plines or sets around a location by creating a new set, pline or hatching on the current layer or reporting the area.
The Lot# entered becomes the name of the pline or set.
To hatch, select a hatch pattern and scale.
Select "Report area only" to avoid creating the pline or set.
The Basic Area, Alt Area and accumulated Alt Area are shown in the message scroll according the MEASUNIT and UNITSSET settings.
Gaps less than the maximum Snap Distance are crossed automatically. Any duplicate points can be removed from the new set.
You can continue to select locations without leaving GCTRACE.
Typical applications include reporting, bounding and shading areas (in any view) and creating closed figures from messy linework such as subdivision lots or volume boundaries.
The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT.
See also TRACEBDY which has a fixed maximum snap distance, LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points and QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary and hatching commands HATCHPAT, HATCHUSER and HATCHENC.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Set\Trace enclosing boundary and Draw\Hatch\Within multiple lines | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Add Geocomp Update to Terramodel Search Path.
If you manually replace the Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini with one from another computer where the Geocomp Update has not been installed, run GC64BIT from the command line to fix tmodwin.ini. If GC64BIT will not run, try typing GCTSP at the command line to add the ...\Terramodel\Geocomp folder to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP), restart Terramodel then try GC64BIT again.
GCTSP.TML must be in the \Terramodel\TMLs folder so it can be found.
GCTSP is aliased to GC64BIT so typing GCTSP at the command line will fix the the paths in tmodwin.ini files copied from 32-bit Windows, unless the Geocomp Update is not found, in which case GCTSP will add the Geocomp folder so you can then run GC64BIT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update | CG 9 |
Set current text style.
Usage: GCTSTYLE textstyle. For example, type GCTSTYLE seg_label to change the current text style to seg_label.
Use in combination with toolbars, aliases or macros. For example, the following macro sets the current text style to tmodelf_50 then prompts for text:
Start Macro gctstyle tmodelf_50 stext End Macro
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx.
For newer Trimble instruments, replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) export using DC file, GCDCOUT or GCMULTDC.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel.
Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel.
See also ROAD_RUN.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Compute swept path of vehicle.
Create plines showing the swept path of a vehicle.
Place vehicle outlines at intervals along the path.
Store dimensions and layers for a single vehicle or a prime-mover and one or two trailers.
For simple cases, GCTURN can be used in place of AutoTURN and AutoTrack.
| 10/01/13 | $250 |
Export files to Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.
Export the centreline, coordinate, profile and triangle files required for any equipment fitted with current versions of Leica Geosystems Universal Machine Control 3D.
Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a GEO file or a selected DTM to export as an XML.
Click on Create Files to be prompted for Arc-to-Chord tolerances and the LIN output file name. Then click OK to create the files.
- Road job
- The main alignment of the selected roadjob is exported as centreline (.LIN) and profile (.PRF) files.
- GEO (3D Lines):
- If you select any points, sets or plines, a .GEO file is created.
- DTM:
- Specify a DTM layer to be exported as a LandXML file. Triangles inside dead areas are not exported. You can limit the DTM to a boundary.
- Settings
-
- Arc to Chord
- Wherever the plines or sets contain arcs or spirals, additional coordinates are written to the .LIN, PRF, or .GEO files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances.
- Generate Report
- You can report to P3Pad every record written to the LIN, PRF, GEO or XML files.
- Export Filename:
- Specify the location and name of the .LIN file. Any PRF, .GEO or .XML file names will match.
- Create Files
- Write .LIN and .PRF files then any .GEO or .XML files
Then load the files onto a current version of Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.
See also POWERGDE, GRADESMT and DTM2XML.
| 20/02/13 | Geocomp Update or $250 |
Break sets and plines into segments.
This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes.
GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing curves.
DISJOIN is aliased to GCUNJOIN.
See also JOIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Part of the Geocomp Update.
This file is required for TMLs issued with the Geocomp Update since Terramodel 10.60. It does not run by itself.
If you get a GCUPDATE message, contact Geocomp Systems and advise the the complete message.
| Geocomp Update | CG M |
Delete selected registered VALs.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Move vertical alignment intersection point.
See GCPRFEDT instead.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 412 |
Create a pline VAL from a registered vertical alignment with offsets.
A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the vertical alignment manager.
The vertical IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.
A report is displayed showing each chainage, vertical offset and elevation of each IP.
See also GCHALOFF.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 450+412 |
Import Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).
The .VER file is imported as a pline in the profile view.
Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the VER.
See also GCLNGIN, GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Import Geocomp VER | Geocomp Update or $25 | 77,252 |
Export Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).
Converts a pline in the profile view consisting of straights and parabolic curves.
For circular curves, only the IP is converted.
See also GCVERIN and GCHALOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 412 |
Change tunnel wrap status of a layer.
Changes wrap status of a DTM layer to "wrapped" or "unwrapped", without transforming the points.
Use this when you have "unwrapped" data on a "wrapped" layer, or vice versa.
See TUNNELDTM.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create or replace xlines with chainage labels on a roadway.
Create or replace xlines along the horizontal alignment of a selected roadway with nominated offsets at nominated intervals on the nominated layer.
You can add xlines at HAL points, VAL points and skips.
Use the Settings to limit the chainage range or to label the xlines perpendicular to the alignment with chainages, HAL point labels and optionally road name.
The initial default xlines layer is stored in a project variable. Once xlines have been created, the default xlines layer is the layer of the first xline on the alignment.
If there are old xlines, they are deleted and you are prompted whether to reuse the extents of the existing xlines to clip the new xlines. If they are labelled you are prompted whether to delete the text labels.
The default left and right extents also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.
The message scroll reports the main alignment name and description for the current road and default xlines layer.
See also RDXLINES to create xlines at single points, chainages or plines, GC39 to recreate xlines after moving intersection points and XLINES to create xlines without a roadway.
See also GC27 to label xlines.
| 01/09/11 | Roads\More...\Xlines from road | Geocomp Update or $25 | 84 |
Import LandXML points within boundaries.
Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline.
See also LandXML IMPORT script and GCPTSIN.
| 23/02/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export roadjob in LandXML format.
Export roadjob strings at xlines in LandXML cross section format.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
List Geodimeter directory and delete files.
List files on a Geodimeter data collector with option to delete.
After requesting the Geodimeter instrument type and some communication parameters, open the Instrument Directory dialog box, which displays the Area and Job files that are currently stored in the Geodimeter instrument or data collector.
You can use GDMDIR to:
- Determine the current contents of the collector before going into the field.
- Delete files on the collector using the computer
- Confirm serial communication before configuring import or export scripts.
To download Geodimeter survey files see, IMPORT. To edit, see GFE and RDE.
| Command | File\Geodimeter\Geodimeter directory/delete files... | S | GST |
Add GeoNav palettes.
Modifies tmodwin.ini to include GeoNav and Geocomp64 Palettes and one-to-one64 colourmap.
| 01/09/11 | Included with HDMS |
Report distances measured values from objects.
Report point numbers, bearing, slope distance and zenith angles along a segment or between two points.
| Command | Reports/Geometry inquiry | S | 17 |
Report measured values from objects.
Select objects and print a report of selected objects.
| 29/10/08 | RG 429 | Reports\Geometry/Stakeout | S | 17,41 |
Establish the GPS geodetic system.
Use this to define your local grid before importing Trimble GPS Real-Time Kinetic (RTK) data to compute with RDE.
Establish a geodetic system for the project to which any imported GPS (WGS84-based) data will be converted. This geodetic system cannot be modified after a point is created.
- Do not perform geodetic corrections (i.e. "Flat Earth")
- Ignore any data that requires geodetic corrections and do not import it. If an imported DC file contains an embedded coordinate system, that coordinate system becomes the current geodetic system.
- Use local projection
- Use Easting and Northing settings in the RDE\Computation Settings and Tolerances\General Settings tab to create a non-standard geodetic system.
- Use current geodetic system
- Use the geodetic system currently displayed in the following list box as the "local" geodetic system. When GPS (WGS84-based) data is imported, coordinates are converted to the geodetic system set by this command. To import a DC file with an embedded coordinate system, the two coordinate systems must be the same. The WGS84-based data is not stored; however the geodetic system is stored so that the original data can be re-created if necessary.
- Select new geodetic system
- Set a different project geodetic system and geoid model before any points are created within the project.
Choose from
- Coordinate System and Zone
- Calibrated Site
- Default projection (Transverse Mercator) (or enter your own projection parameters)
GEOSYS uses the Trimble Coordinate System Manager (CSMAN).
COORDCON and GCCOORD use a different coordinate system library unrelated to GEOSYS.
| Command | Settings\GPS Geodetic System... | S |
Geodimeter File Editor.
Edit Geodimeter format files including RAW, JOB, UDS, ARE, PTS and PCO.
GFE column headings can be configured. For example, if GFE displays PTS with Easting\Northing, but the PTS file contains Northing\Easting, the data will appear to be incorrect when the GFE headings that are the real problem.
GFE is part of Field Data Module, so no key is required.
See also Geodimeter System Tools (GST), GDMDIR.
Use IMPORT to import Geodimeter survey files.
| Command | gfehelp.hlp | File\Geodimeter\Geodimeter File Editor... | S | GST |
Limit the slope of triangles.
Raise the lowest point in affected triangles in a DTM surface by 1 mm until no triangle has a slope greater than the nominated value.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import data from a Golder Associates format
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Report areas of golf course fairways, greens, bunkers and tees.
Report, sum and label the area of each selected closed set or pline representing a fairway, green, bunker or tee.
The areas of all greens, bunkers and tees with centroids inside a fairway are subtracted from the area of that fairway.
The fairways are selected by record. The greens, bunkers and tees are selected by layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export points to Topografix/Mapsource GPS eXchange Format (.GPX).
Export selected points to a .GPX file optimised for reading into Garmin Mapsource software.
Use Settings to choose the coordinate system from which your coordinates will be converted to latitude and longitude on WGS84.
The waypoint name is derived from either the Terramodel point number or name.
See also GCGPXIN and GARMINOU.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders and dozers.
Export the centreline, plan, layer and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control.
GRADESMT writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances in Carlson .CL, .PLN and .LAY file formats. A DTM can also be exported as a Leica TPStakeout TSB file.
- Road job
- The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,chainage,L,northing,easting. Create one roadjob for each centreline.
- 2D (PLN):
- Select sets or plines to export as a .PLN file for export as a Plan or background map. Each selected set or pline is written to the .PLN as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,northing. If you want hatching, blocks or text in the Plan, explode them to plines first.
- 3D (LAY):
- Select sets joining 3D points to export as a .LAY file for export as a Layer of strings. Each selected set is written to the .LAY as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,northing,elevation.
- DTM:
- Specify a DTM layer to be exported to the Leica TPStakeout ASCII triangle file (.TSA) and binary triangle file (.TSB).
- Settings
-
- Chainage Range
- Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
- Triangles per grid (BinTri):
- As this integer value for triangle density increases, the grid squares increase in size and reduce in number. This value is a trade off between the precision and file size of the TSB file. The initial default value is 20.
- Arc to Chord
- Wherever the strings contain arcs, the additional coordinates are written to the .CL, .PLN and .LAY files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances, in another trade-off between precision and file size. The same tolerances are also approximated along spirals, combining curves and splines.
- Generate Report
- If enabled, every record written to the CL, PLN, LAY and TSA files is also reported to P3Pad.
- Export Filename:
- Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PLN, LAY, .TSA and .TSB files.
- Create Files
- Write a .CL file, then PLN and LAY files if objects were selected. Then, if the DTM layer is not 0, and you confirm that you want to Export triangles, the TSA file is exported and a separate command window opens to run the Leica program BinTri.Exe which converts the TSA file into a TSB. You will need to press any key when prompted, twice.
If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob. These files can be combined into a .PRJ project file using Leica Gradesmart software.
To verify elevations at locations in the .TSB, use Leica TPStakeout software on a Leica survey instrument.
See also TPSTKOUT which can export to other TPStakeout file formats.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $500 |
Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.
The grid is rounded to the nearest interval (unless rows cross the DTM edge multiple times).
Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space not project file size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including Spreadsheets.
See also GRIDEXPT which keeps to grid even when rows cross the DTM edge multiple times and can optionally not round the coordinates to the nominated interval.
DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project.
| 01/09/11 | S | 221+224+188 |
Generate a grid of points, interpolate elevations from a DTM and generate a report.
- Generate a grid of points
- The Grid Layout dialog allows for control of the number of rows and columns, the start location, the rotation and the layer on which the grid points are generated. The grid starts in the top left hand corner, goes across then down. If any points already exist on this layer you will be prompted for the option of deleting any existing points. Thus it is important to have each set of grid points on a unique layer.
- Interpolate elevations onto the grid points
- This function calls DTMPTS command. Select the DTM layer from which to interpolate the heights and the grid points (by the layer on which you created the grid points).
- M.A.D. Report
- Generate a report in Mile-a-Day format.
- The report is displayed in Terramodel's report viewer and saved as a .ELE file.
- L.F. Report
- Generate a report in Landform format.
- The report is displayed in Terramodel's report viewer and saved as a .TXT file.
- C.A.G Report
- Generate a report for Comput-A-Grade irrigation software by Merrilees.
- The report is displayed in Terramodel's report viewer and saved as an .FRL file.
For all reports, the heading is derived from layer name of the grid points. The report lists only the number of points specified when creating the grid earlier. If you have manually inserted or removed points then this report will be wrong.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 221 |
Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.
Round the coordinates to the nominated interval or increment from the lower left corner of the box.
Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space and not project size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including spreadsheets.
DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project.
See also GRDPTS.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 221+244+188 |
Create a grid of points or plines using grid settings.
Create a grid of points or plines then label them like this:
- Use SNAPSET to set the grid origin and bearing
- Use GRIDSET to define the grid spacing and type
- Use GRIDSET to turn the grid on
- Use BOX to create a limiting pline
- Use GRIDMAKE, create the points or plines
- Use GCLABGRD or LABELGRID to label the grid.
See also DTMGRID and GCGENGRD.
| Command | Draw\Pline\Grid | S | 265 |
Configure current grid settings.
Configure the colour, type, spacing and visibility of a display grid for each view mode.
The Grid on tick box, makes the grid visible unless the interval is to close to display or no grid line passes though the display.
Set the Horizontal and Vertical distance between grid intervals, in ground units, for the horizontal and vertical directions. For the Plan, Sheet, and Xsect view modes, the vertical control is dimmed and the vertical spacing is set equal to the horizontal spacing.
Set the grid type to Dots, Ticks or Lines. When the Ticks option is selected, you can enter the horizontal and vertical length of the tick marks in sheet units.
To create a grid of points or plines, use GRIDMAKE or GCGENGRD.
To snap to the grid, use SNAPSET to set a similar snap interval to the grid interval.
| Command | Settings\Grid settings... | S | 93 |
Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected grid cells.
The volumes are reported and text showing the values is created in each cell. The selected cells can be closed plines of any shape.
- Generate grid
- Create regular grid cells as a series of abutting rectangular plines.
- Single
- Compute the cut & fill volume for a single selected grid cell.
- Multiple
- Compute the cut & fill volume for a selection set of grid cells. The results for the individual cells and the total cut & fill volumes are calculated and reported.
Place the generated cells and subcells on different layers, so they can be selected or displayed easily.
If you label the cells with text, use vertical justification in the styles to prevent overwriting.
Because cells can be any shape, the cells could be stockpile boundaries, for example.
See also GCGRDVOL which also controls reports, text layers and style.
| 29/10/08 | Reports\More...\Grid volumes | S | 222 |
Change the name of each object to match its group.
This can be helpful where you want to use groups with a function that uses names. For example, where you want to export to a format that includes a name or description field.
You may then want to use DESC to change numeric names to alphanumeric.
See also REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and LAY2NAME which changes the name of each object to match its layer.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 76 |
Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format.
The DTM can be uploaded into Leica Total Stations that include DTM stakeout software, such as TC1100.
Choose between 8-character and 16-character GSI format. Coordinate shift values are set where the coordinates are 1000000 or above.
DTM Layer Name, JobID and export file name.
Export all triangles in the DTM or only DTM triangles entirely inside a pline boundary.
Depending on the the software installed on the Leica total station, you may be able to also export triangles by TPSTKOUT or EXPORT LandXML or DXF 3DFaces.
See also GCGSIOUT and EXPORT LandXML for alignments and GCPTSOUT for points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Geocomp Systems Support web page.
Type GSSWP at the command line to launch your default web browser and start a new window for the Geocomp Systems Support web page http://www.geocomp.com.au/support/.
| Alias |
Geodimeter Software Tools.
Geodimeter Software Tools (or GST) is a stand-alone application for communication with Geodimeter survey instruments.
While Geodimeter Software Tools 2.02 is included on some Terramodel installation CDs including 9.8, but is largely replaced in later releases of Terramodel by other functions including GFE, RDE, IMPORT, EXPORT, Remote Device Manager and Trimble Data Transfer.
GST is not installed automatically. After installing, (by default to C:\Trimble\GST\Geotool.exe), run GST and check that the Settings are correct for your conventions. Note especially that the default angle units are Grads so you may want to change them to DMS.
GST can be executed from a Terramodel command prompt using an ALIAS.
GST is not secured to a key. If the related application GEOMODEL is installed and run and no key is found, GEOTOOL, which is similar to GST, will run instead. If GEOMODEL finds any Terramodel key, neither GEOTOOL nor GEOMODEL will run (unless the key has Geotool module) so use GST or IMPORT and EXPORT for communication and CONTOUR for contouring.
| Alias |
Create a horizontal alignment by entering curves into a table.
Create or edit a horizontal alignment through entry of intersection point coordinates and curve data into a table.
The curve types are
- POB
- Point Of Beginning: Enter the starting coordinates of the alignment
- ARC
- A circular curve: Enter the IP and radius
- COMBINING
- A spiral/arc/spiral/arc/spiral combination. Enter the IP, two radii, three spiral lengths and a % delta angle (or the arc length as a negative) for the first arc.
- POINT
- Intersection point with no curve: Enter the IP coordinates only.
- SPIRAL
- An curve with one circular arc and two clothoid spiral: Enter IP, radius and two spiral lengths.
See also CURVE.
| Command | Roads\Alignments\HAL data entry | S |
Manage registered horizontal alignments.
Register horizontal alignments, chainage equations and horizontal offsets.
Horizontal alignments are used to designate the path that the design will follow, and to control the way in which features are transitioned.
- HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
- Change the record number of the alignment associated with the HAL. You can register the same set or pline with more than one HAL.
- Name
- Change the name of the registered alignment selected in the list of HALs below.
- HAL
- Enter or pick the set or pline to be registered as the HAL.
- NEW ALIGNMENT
- Add a horizontal alignment to the list of HALs
- Chainage (Station) equations
- Display a list of the chainage equations for the HAL and add or delete chainage equations.
- ALIGNMENT OFFSETS
- Define an alignment in terms of offsets to a main alignment.
- DELETE
- Delete the highlighted HAL from the list.
See also GCACTIVE and VALMANAGER.
| Command | Roads\Alignments\HAL manager | S |
Report horizontal and vertical alignments.
At xlines along selected HAL, design VAL and Existing VAL, report chainage, easting, northing, design elevation, existing elevation, elevation difference and grade.
You can consider skips from the current road job.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries.
Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines.
Select Pattern to hatch with a predefined hatch pattern using HATCHPAT.
Select User to hatch at a user-defined angle and spacing using HATCHUSER.
| Command | Draw\Hatch\With selected pattern and Draw\Hatch\With User-defined pattern | S | 277 |
Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects.
Create a single block by hatching within a single region defined by multiple boundary lines.
Select a predefined hatch pattern, a scale and a location inside the boundary lines.
The block boundary is defined by tracing inside selected boundaries.
The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT.
The hatch scale is stored as a project variable.
HATCHENC has been replaced by GCTRACE which can also create plines or sets, control the maximum snap distance and report Basic and Alt areas.
| 26/09/12 | Draw\Hatch\Within multiple lines | Geocomp Update or $25 | 277 |
Hatch a region within a closed boundary with a pre-defined hatch pattern.
Create a single internal block by hatching within a closed boundary using a predefined hatch pattern and scale in sheet units.
The selection of hatch patterns is defined in the first TMODEL.PAT found in the Terramodel Search Path, which may be a custom folder, or ..\Terramodel\Geocomp, or failing that C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\ or C:\Program files\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\. copy and paste the patterns into TMODEL.PAT.
The default pattern is the first in TMODEL.PAT. The default scale is derived from the plan view scale and the sheet units.
The Hatch toolbox is included in the Geocomp.ws workspace.
You can define your own hatch patterns in TMODEL.PAT, or copy from some other source, as long as they are in the AutoCAD hatch pattern format.
The selection dialog includes a button to load hatch patterns from any PAT file, for that Terramodel session only. The hatch blocks are stored in project, but the patterns are not not, so to create new hatch blocks of the same pattern in a new Terramodel session, you need to reload the pattern, unless they are in the default hatch pattern definition file TMODEL.PAT.
| Command | UG | Draw\Hatch\With selected pattern | S | 277 |
Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries with a user-defined hatch pattern.
Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines using a hatch angle, space and scale.
The spacing and scale are in sheet units.
| Command | Draw\Hatch\With user-defined pattern | S | 278 |
Hydrographic Data Management System.
A suite of tools for processing hydrographic data.
HDMS can be tailored to suit your hydrographic software and instrumentation.
Available in customised versions for several hydrographic systems including Geocomp Systems' GeoNav, Trimble HYDROpro and Reson.
Depth labels can be applied, formatted and weeded.
Depths, points and contours can be coloured by depth ranges.
See also:
- Terramodel HDMS
- GCCOORD: Coordinate System Transformation within Terramodel
- LLGRID: Create a labelled pline grid of latitudes and longitude
- LLTABLE: Create table of coordinates including latitudes and longitudes
- GeoCalc: Coordinate System Transformation - stand alone
- Nav Notes: Related notes and links
- GCGeocode: Select, transform or filter millions of points
| Version 2.10.5 | hdms.pdf | HDMS | POA |
Create hatching coloured by depth.
See HDMS.
| 01/09/11 | in-built help | HDMS\Create blocks by DCL | POA |
Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.
| 29/10/08 | ADD 9.7 347 | File\Misc. Import/Export\HEC-RAS Import | S |
Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.
| 29/10/08 | File\Misc. Import/Export\HEC-RAS Export | S |
Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.
Improved version of HECOUT.
| 01/09/11 | File/ Misc. Import/Export/ HEC-RAS Export | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Terramodel Help.
Open the Welcome page of Terramodel where you can select the main Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help or Raw Data Editor Help.
Terramodel Help details the features of Terramodel commands that are included in the standard Terramodel release.
Press F1 while using standard commands to open the relevant help page.
ALIASes including ?, content, contents, helpexport, helpgfe, helptoolbox, helpimport, helprde, helptv, hlp and man may open particular help pages.
If you get the Windows message "Why can't I get Help from this program?", please go to Installing Terramodel 10.61H where we explain how to download and install WinHelp32.
See also ABOUT, GCHELP, MSFIXIT and DOCUMENTS.
| Command or alias | built-in | Help\Contents | S |
Toggle the visibility of set segments.
REVEAL makes all segments visible for selected sets.
Hidden segments can be labeled with LABELSEG.
DISPLAYSET Ignore Hide setting displays all segments, even hidden ones.
There are times when it is desirable to have a breakline or closed set but hide a segment for plotting purposes. You can also avoid plotting a whole set by using a colour mapped to pen 0 by PLOTSET or giving it an pen-up linetype.
| Command | Draw\Set\Hide segment or Modify\On/Off\Hide set segment | S | 49 |
Report properties of the selected object.
Report or edit properties such as object type, point numbers, north and east coordinates, elevation, name, record number, reference record number, CAD properties, layer name, colour number and linetype.
See EDIT for more details of the properties.
See also GC34 to find a point.
| Command | Reports\Identify object | S | 72 |
Report angle within two lines or three points.
If three point, nominate a pivot point, an ahead bearing and a deflection bearing.
| Command | Reports\Identify angle | S |
Display the chainage and offset.
Display the chainage and offset at the cursor from a selected set or pline.
Select an alignment set or pline. The ACTIVE alignment is the default, unless no active alignment has been set.
For Point, select a location. A rubber band rubberband is drawn from the cursor to the lowest chainage perpendicular to the alignment. Chainage and offset are shown in the coordinate scroll. The rubber band and coordinate scroll are updated as the cursor moves.
A negative offset is to the left of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing stations.
IDSTATION is also known as IDCHAINAGE. See also GCIDCHN, CENVIEW and GC03
| Command | Reports\Identify station or Reports\Identify chainage | S |
Display only objects in the same group.
Turn all objects in the same group as the selected object on, and all other objects off.
See also QISOLATE, LAYERSET, OFF, OFFALL, ON, ONALL, ONGRP and SETGRP.
| 01/09/11 | U | 47 |
Create points at intersections of selected lines.
Choose the layer for the new points and the order of point creation.
In the version supplied by Geocomp Systems, sets as well as plines are supported, and elevations are interpolated. If the elevation cannot be interpolated from the line with the lowest record number, ILINE interpolates from the other record, where possible.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Point\At intersections | S | 303 |
Image manager.
Position, display, plot, and modify BMP, DCX, DIB, GIF, JPEG, PCX, PICT, TIFF, TGA, WMF, and WPG raster images in your project.
The image list shows the image classification; view; name, draw state; and approximate ground coverage (size) in project units for the view. Images are initially ordered by date. Newer images are at the top of the image list. Use the Image Up/Image Down buttons to move an image within the stack.
All images are reloaded each time an image is added or revised.
If you open a project file that is linked to missing images, you are prompted to browse for the image files. Select Yes, to browse for an image, No to postpone browsing for that image or Cancel to postpone browsing for any image.
- Info
- Display more detailed information about an image
- Add
- Add an image to your project.
- Detach
- Remove a link to an image from your project
- Modify, register, or clip an image
- Click the image name, then click the corresponding option button
- Dynaimage
- Associate an image with a dynaview
- Display image
- Toggle the display of the image. Images are memory intensive. Only display images that are absolutely necessary for your work. Images do not use system memory when they are not displayed.
- Draft Mode
- Display the image in draft mode
- Slider controls
- Adjust image brightness, contrast and fade
- Keeper
- Save any derived image (the result of registering, clipping or associating with a dynaview)
- Done
- Display the images as you have specified.
REDRAW to redisplay the images, ADDIMAGE to add an image to multiple plotboxes and IMAGEPTH to change the image paths to a new location.
Refer to Terramodel help for more information.
| Command | File\Image manager | S |
Change file locations for IMAGE manager.
Change the path of all images in a project to the single location of a selected image.
Use IMAGEPTH when you are supplied a project file and images by someone who places images in a different location.
Restart Terramodel to see the new images.
The visibility and location of each image is retained.
| 01/02/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Island manager.
Create, copy and delete traffic island templates and assign templates to road jobs.
The Island Manager has similar features to the finish and subgrade template managers.
The chainage list box shows all of the currently defined templates for the specified roadway, including the station at which the template starts, its name, and the number of shapes it contains on the each side.
| Command | Roads\Road design\Island manager | S |
Import data using scripts.
Using a system of programmable scripts, import from to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD dwg, dxf, TDS, Microstation .dgn, Terramodel .pro and LandXML.
You can also download the file from some survey instruments using the Remote Device Manager.
IMPORTSMGR controls and edits the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also EXPORT and DFEDIT.
Terramodel can take a long time to IMPORT a DXF or DWG file if it has to remove duplicate points as it goes. If there is a layer called DXF_NO_PT_CHK at the time of import, the duplicate points are not removed. Then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
| Command | UG, FDM | File\Download/Import | S | 293, FC A, FC D, FC I, FC T |
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 157 |
Import script manager.
Open the Import script manager where you can create, edit, and delete import scripts.
You can also run an import script from the script manager by selecting the script and clicking the Run button.
For Help, Press F1 while creating a script.
The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the ...\Shared\ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the IMPORT menu and the file extension is .xe. If not ticked, it is not visible, and .xe_.
| Command | Files\Download/Import\Import script manager | S | MM G |
Import cross sections into a Roadway.
Supports a range of formats. Each format has its own additional TML. Supported formats include: Geocomp CES, Terramodel Roads V8, Texas RDS, Geopak, Agtek, NCDOT and Softdesk.
To import a file of chainage, offset, elevation without a Roadway, see GC65FILE instead.
Import Cross Sections.
- Register a HAL in the HALMANAGER
- Create xlines using GCXLINES
- Define a Road Job in the ROADJOB Manager.
- Insert surfaces using the SURFACE Manager. The order of the surfaces may be important.
- If a surface is a finished design surface, define it as Finish.
- Check that all surfaces to be imported are not sliced.
- Specify for each surface, whether they are elevation or depth surfaces.
- In the XSection Manager, Select Import XSection.
- Select a Roadway Cross Section surface or a DTM layer, or both, into which to import the .cross section data.
- Select from the listed Import File Types. See note below.
- Press Import to select the cross section file.
- You then have the option to sort points on offset. If the points represent a DTM, select Yes. If the surface includes overlaps, as in a tunnel, select No.
- Close twice to exit these functions.
- Go to XSection Editor to see the cross sections.
- Return to Import XSection if you have more surfaces to import.
Notes about importing Geocomp Cross Section Files
- To import the Geocomp .CES format, you need IMPORTGC and IMPORTXS must have the format in the import menu.
- Select Geocomp Existing if you are importing the first surface (typically the Existing) in the .CES file.
- Select Geocomp Design if you are importing the second and any other surfaces (typically Design).
- Sections are placed using chainages in the selected HAL, not centre-line coordinates in the CES file.
- To create a Roadway from sets, use GC37 to create a Geocomp Existing Surface .CES file, then import as described above.
Create a Roadway from points.
- Create a Horizontal Alignment.
- Define Xlines at similar intervals to your field cross sections.
- Select XSOUT (XSections from Points from the DTM menu).
- Pick your HAL, and select all your points to be included in the sections.
- Define a tolerance for which your points may lay off the Xlines.
- Select an output type as ROADS and name the file.
- Register your HAL in the Hal Manager.
- Use the Road Job Manager to create a new road job which uses the previously defined HAL.
- Use the Surfaces button in the Road Job Manager to insert a surface into your cross sections. Select Elevation and Slice.
- Run IMPORTXS. Select file type of Terramodel Road V8 and import the .xsc file created above.
- Use the Xsection Editor to view the Cross Sections, or use RDX to plot the cross sections.
| 01/09/11 | RG 919 | Roads\Road design\Xsection manager | S | 423 |
Create text from incrementing numbers.
Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified integer and incrementing by one.
Great for house and lot numbers.
You can set a prefix, suffix, text style and direction.
See also GCINCTXT which allows for other increments and real numbers.
| 01/09/11 | ADD 9.3 157 | Draw\Text\Incrementing text | S | 92 |
Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files.
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Create sets with elevations interpolated or extrapolated from specified points.
This is useful for estimating surfaces for volume calculations. Draw a set like a pline, specifying elevations for only those points where the elevation is known, leave the rest of the points with elevations = *. Elevations where unknown are automatically interpolated or extrapolated from the 3D points.
The points with known elevations are given the name "tm_3d", and the others are named "tm_2d".
Use INTERP3D to recompute the elevations on "tm_2d" points if any of the "tm_3d" points are later changed.
See also GC50.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1249 | Draw\Set\Interpolated 3D set | S | 185 |
Modify elevations of points with name "tm_2d".
Elevations are interpolated from elevations of points in the same set with name "tm_3d".
Use INTERP3D to recompute elevations interpolated by INT3DSET after any points in the set have been changed.
See also GC50 which does not require named points, but therefore cannot be updated automatically.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1252 | Draw\Set\Update interp. 3D | S |
Insert points into a set.
Insert the selected points into a set if the points are within a specified distance of the set.
The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Design irrigation bays.
Survey, design, estimate and plot of flood irrigation projects in a single application.
Given the bay layout and existing surface, adjust the slopes and levels of each bay to optimise and balance the earthworks.
Includes several related files.
| 01/09/11 | Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual | POA |
Traffic island editor.
The Island Editor has similar menus and features to the finish and subgrade template editors. The most significant difference in the Island Editor is the way the user designs an island — from the outside in.
Island Editor use of multiHal transitions to tie the outside edge of the template (usually a kerb) to a pre-defined line or group of lines. Then the template is built from preexisting shapes towards the centre of the island.
To Create an Island
- Use Terramodel to design a road as usual.
- Create a line or several lines that outline the edge of the islands.
- Name these lines consistently so that you can refer to the group uniquely with a base name and wildcard (ex: Island1, Island2, Island3). Line names are case sensitive.
- Enter an island template chainage in the IMANAGER
- Open the Island editor
- Add the first shape (usually the outer kerb of the island) to the template with a multiHal transition.
- Enter the base name and wildcard of the lines outlining the islands in the MultiHal object control.
- You should usually click the New Island checkbox for the first shape; selecting this checkbox applies the multiHal transition to the shape.
- Build the rest of the island template towards the centre of the island, using familiar island editor functions.
| Command | Roads\Road design\Island editor | S |
Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file.
Convert a Geodimeter job file created by a Geodimeter or Trimble instrument into a Geodimeter Raw data file with .AGA file extension suitable for use with GCIMPORT.
Geodimeter Raw files are slightly different to Geodimeter .JOB files.
This function does not convert Trimble DC .JOB or Journal .JOB files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create a Geodimeter job file from points.
Select a station and a number of points, then create a Geodimeter .job file of pseudo-observations computed from the points such that if the job file is reduced they would match the original coordinates.
For applications that compute from observed Geodimeter data, rather than coordinates. For example, so you can correct for a vertical collimation error in a Geocomp FLD file using GCIMPORT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Join sets with common points.
If there are gaps, use CONNECT instead.
See also DISJOIN to break sets and plines into segments.
| Command | Edit\Join | S |
Import data from Keays transfer (TR?) files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 | FC T |
Export data to Keays transfer (TR1) files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 |
Export DTM layer to Kork format.
| 29/10/08 | S |
Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set.
Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set using the current text style.
| 01/09/11 | ADD 9.3 157 | Draft\Label angle-right | S |
Label segment with radius as text along.
| 06/10/11 | S | 91 |
Label contour plines with text.
Place contour labels on plines manually.
For adding a few extra labels to those generated by CONTOUR or for when you have contour plines but no DTM.
| Command | Draft\Label contours | S | 93 |
Label grid within a box.
See also GCLABGRD which has more options including making the grid and GRIDMAKE.
| Command | Draft/Label grid/ | S | 93 |
Label horizontal alignment intersection points.
Label a single location on a HAL, or a whole HAL.
See also GC27, GCLABIP, LABELPI and LABELVAL.
| Command | Draft\Label HAL | S | 93,84 |
Label horizontal alignments with names in plotboxes.
Label selected HALs inside each selected pline box on the selected layer.
Text objects in the selected text style showing the name of the alignment are placed along the alignment close to the centre of each selected plotbox.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Change lot area labels to show alternative area.
Change lot area labels created by LABELSETS to show the Alternative Area set in UNITSSET Labeling and Conversion Factors. The Alt areas are typically Acres or Hectares.
For each selected set, if the area of the set is greater than the entered value, and the "Acreage" text height is 0.000, change the "Acreage" text height to the same value as "Sq. Units" (if non-zero), and change the "Sq. Units" value to 0.000. The text height is in sheet units and may vary from lot to lot.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 | 64 |
Label intersection points
Label intersection points with no curve on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, Delta angle, Easting and Northing.
Chainages are labelled with "Sta".
The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically.
See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label IPs | S | 84 |
Label points with point labels and symbols.
Label selected points with symbols and labels derived from point label blocks.
Label Points Options
- Freeze/Thaw
- Toggle the display of all point labels.
- Settings
-
- Copy Settings from Pt
- Select a labeled point from which to copy point label settings.
- Symbol
-
- Map to Symbol
- Map symbols to point names as defined in the SYMBOL.MAP file
- Number
- Enter a symbol number from the SYMBOL.FNT file
- Size
- Enter a size (in sheet units) for your symbols. The size given here remains constant regardless of the drawing scale.
- Rotation
- Enter a rotation angle. The closest 2° increment is used.
- Block Label
-
- Description
- Select the description of a block containing a predefined point label.
- Rotation
- Enter the rotation angle (between 0° and 359°) in 22.5° degree increments
- Offset
- Enter the offset distance (in sheet units) from the point to the insertion point of the label. This distance is rounded to an even number of multiples, between 0 and 15, of the offset delta distance.
- Brg to Label
- Set the bearing from the point to the insertion point of the block along the offset distance in 22.5° increments
- Add Line
- Draw a line from each labeled point to the insertion point of its label
- Hi/Low Only
- Label only DTM points at high and low spots.
- Mirror About X
- Mirror the label about the X axis. Any text with in the label will still be readable.
- Offset Delta
- Enter the maximum distance from a point to a label. A typical value is 0.10 or 0.15 (sheet units). When set to zero you cannot move the point labels.
- Pts
- Select the points to be labelled.
- On/Off
- Turn on or off the display of the point labelling for selected points.
- Explode
- Explode point labels into text and pline objects on the layer of the point.
- Move
- Opens the Label Points Move command bar, where you can move the block label to a new location.
- Label
- Label the selected points
See also F7, F9, F11, , GC93 and PTLAB.
| Command | Draft\Label points with blocks | S | 110 |
Label a registered horizontal alignment with intersection points
Label a registered horizontal alignment using the LABELHAL settings.
| Command | Roads\Labeling\Label HAL | S | 84 |
Label a registered vertical alignment with intersection points
Label a registered vertical alignment using the LABELVAL settings.
| Command | Roads\Labeling\Label VAL | S | 412 |
Label set segments with dimensions.
Create EAT text objects labelling the bearings and/or distances of selected straight set segments, and the curve properties of curved set segments.
The resulting labels dynamically update to display the revised segment geometry as the points that define the labeled set segments move. Labels that are created such that they are aligned with and placed along the line segment move with that segment as it moves. The labels are created in accordance with the current straight line and arc segment label styles which control the content and placement of the geometric properties associated with a line and curve segment respectively.
Label Segments Options
- AUTO
- Label a straight or curved set segment with a smart text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. The position of the label is set automatically by Terramodel along the segment. If the points making up this segment move, the text will follow and will be updated to reflect the altered geometry.
- USER
- Label a straight or arc set segment with a text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. It is typically used in a case where the segment is too short for the label to fit along the segment. The location of the label can therefore be pulled away from the line segment placed as desired by the user. If desired, a leader line will automatically point from the label to the midpoint of the line segment. If the segment's points move, the displayed geometry will update and the leader line endpoint will move with the segment, but the label's location will not move.
- PT TO PT
- Label a bearing and/or distance between two selected point objects, whether or not they are connected with a line segment. The label can be located at any position and orientation that you select, or it can automatically be positioned along the line between those two points.
- MULTIPLE
- Label all the currently unlabelled segments of the selected sets with bearings and/or distances.
Tips on using Label Segments
- These labels are text objects which employ special EAT codes that allow them to reference the points which they label. This allows the EAT code to dynamically compute the geometry to be displayed, and therefore to always reflect the current geometry.
- You can edit the segment label text to include supplemental text in addition to the EAT code that displays the geometry. The EAT code, if left undisturbed by this editing, will continue to function as intended. As an example, you could add the text "(F)" to the end of a bearing/distance label to indicate that it represents a measurement as found in the field, as opposed to a deed measurement.
- LABELSEG opens in any of four optional modes. The default mode is that of the last used option. You can choose to label a segment with the default option, or select another option to open a different command bar.
- You can also label straight poly line segments with standard text that is not linked to points. Such labels therefore will not dynamically update if the plines geometry changes, nor will these labels move with the pline when it is moved.
See also GCDIMLOT which dimensions using EAT text that is easier to edit and LABELSETS which labels sets with lot numbers and areas.
| Command | Draft\Label segments | S | 75 |
Label sets with lot number and area.
- SETS
- Identify the sets to be labeled.
- ON/OFF
- Turn on and off the display of the selected labels.
- TEXT
- Creates text objects from the set labels of the selected sets, and stores them on the current layer.
- NUMBER
- Number a series of sets sequentially.
- FREEZE
- Toggle the display of all set attribute labels. Select Freeze to hide attribute set labels. Select Thaw to display the labels.
- SETTINGS
- Customize your set labels with block number, lot number and label attributes.
- LABEL
- Complete the set labelling after you have selected your sets and customized the set labels.
See also LABELLOT which changes lot labels to show the alternative areas, GCLABLOT which creates EAT text objects instead of labels and LABELSEG which labels set segments with dimensions.
| Command | Draft\Label sets | S | 64 |
Label a chainage using text with a leader line.
Label a chainage with text leader lines at a chainage and offset from a horizontal alignment.
- Run LABELSTA or LABELCH command
- Select a horizontal alignment (HAL) in the Plan view mode.
- Define a offset distance from the centerline graphically of by entering an offset in sheet units.
- Pick a chainage to label
- Click OK to create the chainage label using the current text style.
| 29/10/08 | Draft\Label Chainage values | S | 93 |
Create a table of attribute text for selected lines and curves.
Create, edit, move, name or control visibility of tables. Table objects are only created by LABELTABLE and so are distinct from plines, text and blocks. Label tables are used to tabulate dimensions of short lines in subdivisions.
- FREEZE
- Freeze to hide or Thaw to display all tables.
- SETTINGS
- Open the Label Table Settings dialog box.
- CREATE
- Create a new line/curve table.
- DELETE
- Delete an existing table.
- NAME TABLE
- Assign a name to an existing table.
- REVISE
- Change an existing table.
- TBL ON/OFF
- Toggle the display of a selected table on or off.
- ADD ENTRY
- Add a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.
- DELETE ENTRY
- Delete a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.
- MOVE ENTRY
- Move a table entry from one location in the table to another.
- FLIP ENTRY
- Move a segment label to the other side of the segment and reverse the bearing direction.
- LABEL ENTRY
- Add entries to an existing table.
- MAKETEXT
- Convert a segment label (but not a table) to text objects.
- ON/OFF ENTRY
- Turn on and off the display of selected table entries.
- TURN ENTRY
- Rotate the segment label reference 180° while leaving it on the same side of the segment.
UNITSSET precision controls the decimal places of bearings and distances in the table. Variable precision is not applied. To round bearings or distances in tables according to distance, first EXPLODE the label table into text and plines, then use TEXTRND to round the resulting text to a predefined cadastral standard.
Some functions, such as CRDTABLE, create "tables" of plines and text, but these are not table objects.
| Command | Draft\Label line/curve tables | S |
Label vertical alignment intersection points.
Label a single location on a VAL, or a whole VAL.
See also GC27, GCLABIP, LABELPI and LABELHAL.
| Command | Draft\Label Val | S | 412 |
Label grade between two points.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, easting, northing, elevation, name or symbol.
Create "smart text" (EAT) objects labelling selected points.
Point labels can be defined by graphical example, based on an existing point label or a temporarily placed template, or by editing a dialog box.
The settings can then be saved to or loaded from a file. LABPT settings files have an .LPS filename extension.See also LABPTQ.
| 01/09/11 | RG 256 | Draft\Label points with text | S | 110 |
Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, elevation or name.
Select any combination of the three. Set layer, text style and colour.
See also LABPT.
| 29/10/08 | S | 110 |
Create a herringbone floor.
For use in landfill drainage systems.
One requirement for a landfill is that the drainage must "feel" a net percentage (2%) slope across the trough system. The user begins with a known low point and the desired longitudinal and transverse slopes. A series of troughs is created and the data points connected with sets in order to ensure the correct DTM formation.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1233 | Cogo\Create landfill floor | S |
Change the name of each object to match its layer.
This can be helpful where the data has been classified by layer, but you need to plot or export using names.
Names of text objects and blocks are not changed.
See also DESC which changes numeric names to alphanumeric, REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and GRP2NAME which changes name of each object to match its group.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 76 |
Select current layer from a list.
The list can also be selected from the toolbar button next to the current layer.
See also SETCURL for picking a layer by an object and LAYERSET for other layer settings.
| Command | S | 287 |
Rename layers based on .map file.
The map file format is simply:
old_layer,new_layer
Use # to start any comment lines.
The maximum length of a Terramodel layer name is 16.
Layers are simply renamed; objects are not relayered. If layer names are duplicated in the mapping file, or already exist in the project, layer names will be duplicated (which should be avoided).
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order.
Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order, which is the same sort order as LAYERSET.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Create, edit and delete layers.
Layers have become an accepted standard for CAD systems and are used for grouping common objects together so that they can be manipulated as a whole. When an object is created, it derives its colour and linetype from the current settings of the layer on which it is placed. This creates a simple and logical means of assigning these CAD properties to objects as they are created. These settings are stored with the project file.
In addition to the common CAD uses of layers, Terramodel also views each layer as a separate DTM. You can separate logical portions of the design onto different layers and control each terrain model on a layer-by-layer basis. The Layer Settings dialog box is used to control several other layer properties. When a single layer is selected, it is highlighted in the layer list box and its name is displayed in the Name edit control. To select a single layer, simply click the desired name in the layer list box. To select multiple layers, press and hold CTRL while clicking your layer selections. To select all of the layers in the layer list box use the Select All command button.
Limit which layers will be listed in the layer list box by using the mask setup options described later.
Changes in the colour and linetype settings for layers do not change the properties of any existing objects—only objects that are created subsequently. Objects that are set to display the colour by layer will display the current layer colours.
- Name
- Change the name of the selected layer. This control is only available when a single layer is selected.
- (Layer) Colour
- Establish the colour of all objects, except points, to be created on each selected layer. When an object has a colour number of 0, Terramodel draws the object using the current colour setting of the layer on which the object is drawn.
- Ptcolour
- Establish the colour of points to be created on each selected layer. When an object has a colour number of 0 Terramodel draws the object using the current colour setting of the layer on which the object is drawn.
- (Layer) Linetype
- Establish the linetype that will be used for lines created on one or more selected layers.
- Status
- Set layer display and usage properties.
The current status of each layer is displayed in the second column of the layer list box.
None of the status properties are applied until the OK command button is selected.
Status changes accumulate while you are in the Layer Settings dialog box until you click OK.
For instance, you might change the status of certain layers and then use the mask setup to display only a subset of those layers.
All status changes are applied when the OK command button is selected — regardless of the layers currently displayed in the layer list box.
- Visibility
- Control the visibility of all objects on one or more selected layers. When a layer is visible a "V" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. In addition to layer visibility, each object also has its own visibility status. If a layer is visible, you can also control the visibility of each object on the layer. When a layer is not visible, none of the objects on that layer are displayed, regardless of the visibility status of each object. When objects are not displayed they cannot be selected by the graphical selection options of the window, or clicking with the record select option. Non-visible objects can be selected by other direct means such as by colour, layer, linetype, etc.
- Snap
- Control whether you can graphically select objects using the window select option and clicking on objects with the record select option. When you can snap to objects on a layer, an "S" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. Searching the database by graphical selection goes much faster when Snap is turned off.
- Lock
- Control whether you can modify objects on the layer or add objects to the layer.
- Isolate
- Display a single selected layer. When the layer is isolated an "I" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. When isolated, only the selected layer will be displayed. When the isolate status is removed, all other layers return to their previous display status. Only one layer at a time can be isolated. When a layer is isolated, you cannot turn off its visibility.
- Delete
- Delete selected layers. When the delete status is set, the V, S, and I designations are replaced with "####" and are dimmed. Layers must be empty, in all views, before they can be deleted. Selected layers are not actually deleted until you click OK.
- Select All
- Select all the layers displayed in the layer list box. When all layers are selected only the visibility, snap, and lock status options can be set.
- Select by Llist
- Select or create a named list of layers. Using LLIST, you can associate this named list of layers with one or more dynaviews, allowing you to view only the layers contained in the layer list through the dynaview(s).
- Info
- Display the number of points on a selected layer as well as the minimum and maximum extents of the points on the layer.
- Offsets
- Enter profile elevation and chainage offsets for the highlighted layer. The elevation and chainage offsets for each layer are measured with respect to the first layer you created for the profile view.
- New
- Create a new layer.
- Mask setup
- Mask setup is a filter which lets you reduce the number of layers shown in the layer list box to those whose names have one or more characters in common. The abbreviated list keeps you from having to scroll through the entire list box to find specific layers.
- Mask
- Enter a mask. The mask supports wildcard characters, for example: *CON* where you want Terramodel to list layers with "CON" anywhere in the layer name.
- Use mask
- This check box toggles the mask off and on.
- Include off/locked layers
- These check boxes let you choose to include layers that have their status off and/or locked. When the objects on a layer are locked they cannot be edited, and an "L" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. Each time you change the mask phrase or Include options, toggle Off the Use Mask check box then toggle it back on to update your layer list.
| Command | Settings\Layer settings... | S |
List summary information by layer for selected points.
List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.
The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points.
See also DTMINFO, OLIST and LIST.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\More...\Layer information | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Make layers in the selected layerlist visible, and other layers invisible.
| 01/09/11 | View\Layer list | Geocomp Update or $25 | 130 |
Create parallel sets for subdivisions.
Creates parallel offset lines, intersections and cul-de-sacs from a centreline alignment.
Layout rights of way, footpaths, kerbs, gutters and intersections for an entire subdivision with a few steps.
- Create a layer for each class of roadway. A class of roadway is defined by the required offset line work that Layout creates and the type of intersections you will use.
- Create the design centreline for each roadway, placing the line work on each layer by class.
- Using the Settings option, define the offset parameters for each of the layers that you will use. Place the offset lines on layers that can be erased by layer name to simplify the process each time you re-design the roadways.
- Use the Cul-de-sac option to define a typical cul-de-sac. Use CULDESAC for more complex cul-de-sacs.
- Use the Offset option to select all of the centrelines to create offset line work.
- Use the Intersect option after the Offset option to layout intersections.
-
Streets/Layout Options
- SETTINGS
- Establish offset parameters for centreline alignments based on the layers on which they exist.
- OFFSET
- Create offset alignments for selected centreline alignments.
- INTERSECT
- Create intersections for selected centreline alignments based on the parameters established for Radius and Return types in the Settings option.
- CUL-DE-SAC
- Establish the cul-de-sac parameters for a selected HAL. When a selected alignment is assigned cul-de-sac parameters, it automatically creates a cul-de-sac with the Offset option.
| Command | Cogo\Streets\Layout | S | 71 |
Relayer and colour selected objects based on first four characters in name.
This is primarily used to convert a ROADDTM layer to separate layers for conversion to Microstation.
The name attribute of each RoadDtm object is derived from the point codes in the Road Template Shapes.
If the first four characters in the name match the first four characters in the MAP file, then the object will be relayered to the layer nominated in the map file. If the layer in the map file does not exist, it will be created with the nominated colours.
Each line in the map file is in the format:
Name,Layer,Colour
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $50 |
Locate coordinate.
Report the coordinate of the selected location.
| 01/09/11 | U | 72 |
Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) information.
| 29/10/08 | RG 676 | Cogo\Utilities\3 Wire level reduction | S | level |
Report the level (stadia) points.
| 29/10/08 | RG 679 | Cogo\Utilities\Level note reports | S |
Add or edit single wire level (stadia) information.
| 29/10/08 | RG 673 | Cogo\Utilities\Level note reductions | S | level |
Import Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data in a grid.
Import X, Y, Z and Intensity from common ASCII LIDAR file formats in a grid.
The intensity value is assigned to the colour number and name. With some colourmaps, this displays different features such as trees more clearly.
You can limit the import to only points within a closed boundary pline or an offset from a pline alignment.
If you specify a Grid Interval, only points within the specified Max Distance of locations on the grid will be imported. For example, if the data is at roughly 1m spacing and you only want 10m spacing, specify a Grid Interval 10 and Max Distance less than 1.
To ignore grids, use LIDARIN.
To import ESRI gridded LIDAR files, use GCESRIIN.
You can further reduce the number of points using 3DFILTER.
| 03/02/10 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data.
Import X, Y, Z and Intensity from common ASCII LIDAR file formats.
The intensity value is assigned to the colour number and name. With some colourmaps, this displays different features such as trees more clearly.
You can import only the points within a closed boundary pline or an offset from a pline alignment.
To import only points on a grid, use LIDARGRD.
To import ESRI gridded LIDAR files, use GCESRIIN.
You can further reduce the number of points using 3DFILTER.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Evenly space points where coordinates are wrong.
Recompute X and Y of points on a set by linear interpolation and even spacing, between two points. The elevations are unchanged.
Use this to estimate the position of coordinates where the X and Y positions are incorrect but the sequence and elevations are correct, for example when a GPS and echo sounder passes under a bridge.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Modify the linetype of selected plines and sets.
Use LINETYPESET to load linetypes from a .LIN file.
If Quick Linetype is enabled in DISPLAYSET the linetype is displayed as SOLID.
To modify the linetype so it displays By Layer, use LINEZERO.
| Command | Modify\Linetype | S | 40 |
Load or purge selected linetypes.
Use Load to list of the linetypes within the currently specified file .LIN file (it defaults to tmodwin.lin) or browse to select and load linetypes from a different linetype file. Any linetype previously loaded into the project is replaced by the new definition. The maximum number of linetypes that can be loaded is 255.
Use Purge to list linetypes within the project file that are not in use. If a linetype is in use it can not be purged. Select one or more of the listed linetypes and purge as desired. Removing a linetype definition saves a small amount of memory but more importantly reduces the choices in the list of linetypes to make selection easier.
See Terramodel User Guide Chapter 5 for the linetype format description.
The Terramodel .LIN file is in a different format to the AutoCAD .LIN format.
| Command | Settings\Linetype settings | S |
Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar.
LinetypeToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINETYPETOGGLE which simulates the Linetype toolbar toggle in the Window menu.
| Macro | Window\Toolbar\Linetype | S and User-definable |
Draw samples of all the currently loaded linetypes.
Create samples of currently loaded linetyes on the current layer in the sheet view.
This gives a visual indication of what is available in the current project.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 180 |
Modify linetype to By layer.
Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets to By Layer.
Plines or sets with a linetype of By Layer are displayed according to the linetype configured in LAYERSET for the layer they are on.
See also COLOUR to Colour By Layer and LINETYPE to select other linetypes.
| 31/07/12 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Configure DTM links.
Control the way all DTM points are linked by commands that form DTMs.
-
Link settings
- Elevation tolerance for flat triangles
- Set this tolerance for use with Remove Flat triangles.
- Maximum edge distance
- Where the distance between two edge points is greater than this maximum edge distance, the edge link is excluded unless this would prevent every DTM point from being linked into a single connected DTM, or there is a DTM edge formed by a series of connected breakline sets. This reduces the number of long thin triangles around the edge of the model.
- Maximum edge angle
- Where the angle opposite an edge link is greater than the maximum edge angle the link is excluded. This controls the number of thin edge triangles. The maximum value is 179°.
- Display links
- Display links for the selected DTM layers.
- Link colour
- The colour in which all links are displayed. If the colour is 0, the line colour of the layer in LAYERSET is used.
- Display links on layers
- Select one or more DTM layer for which links are to be displayed
- Remove flat triangles
- Rearrange links to remove as many any flat triangles as possible along breaklines when the elevation is within the specified tolerance of the first point in the set. This enhances DTMs created from digitized contour lines.
- Show triangle slope
- Show the slope of each triangle by an arrow. The display size of the arrow is fixed, so the zoom level determines the plotted size of the arrow. See also MG1 and GCFALL.
- Quick contours
- Interpolate and display contours with no smoothing for the selected DTM layers in the link colour. To create smooth contours, or create plines or text labels, use CONTOUR.
- Quick isopach generation
- This should be normally OFF so that during volume computation where the two DTM surfaces intersect additional points and breaklines are created in the isopach surface for a more accurate volume.
- Remove link between BLs
- When enabled, commands that cut cross-sections or profiles from a DTM will remove points interpolated on the link line between breaklines from the cross-section or profile unless:
- The point on the link line lies 0.10m or more away from the interpolated line segment
- The two adjacent breaklines share a common endpoint
- The cross section line crosses two or more link lines between the two breaklines
- Advanced
- Link buffer
- Specify the number of unused links to initially allocate to each point. By initially allocating additional memory for each link during the linking process, fewer memory operations are required during linking and the link time is reduced. A value of two is recommended for optimal speed. Higher values will waste memory during linking and may take longer.
- Link step
- Determines the order in which points are linked. If the link step is the recommended value of ten, every tenth point is linked before all the other points are linked, added to the DTM. This can save DTM formation time with some gridded data sets. Increase this value if you exceed the maximum number of links that can be connected to a single point.
Once you have established the correct maximum edge distance and angle for a particular DTM layer, create a DTMEDGE to retain those settings, before changing the link settings to suit a different DTM layer in the same project.
| Command | Settings\Link settings | S |
Toggle on or off the DTM link display.
LinkToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINKTOGGLE which toggles the DTM links using LINKSET then REDRAW.
| Macro | User-definable |
List information about selected types of objects.
List information to the P3pad report editor, where it can be formatted, manipulated and saved to a file or sent to your printer.
Choose one of these reports:
- Layers
- Display layer name, colour, linetype and number of objects (in all views) for the current layers defined in the project file with LLAYER.
- Objs
- Display the layer the objects exists on, the type of object, the name, the number of elements (for plines and sets), colour and linetype with LOBJS.
- Points
- Display Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Name, etc., with LPOINTS or GCLPTS.
- Upts
- Display the unused point numbers within a specified point number range with LUNUSED.
- Sets
- Display set names, number of points in the set and a list of the point numbers forming the set with LSETS.
- Plines
- Display pline elevation, control points (vertices) and curve information with LPLINES.
- Lots
- Display a table of information about selected lots (closed sets) with LLOTS.
Each report be started by selecting the LIST button, or directly from the command line by entering the command, or LIST then the first letters of the option. For example, to list the plines, enter LPLINES, LIST PL or LIST then select the Plines button.
| Command | Reports\List | S | 27 |
List and create a table of loaded fonts
List the loaded fonts in the message scroll and create table of sample text in the sheet view on layer LIST_FONTS.
This the list of fonts used by text objects, text objects in blocks, text style settings and other Terramodel settings.
LISTFONT does not list other available fonts. See TEXTMETRICS and FONTCHNG to load other fonts.
As text is imported from a DWG, DXF or DGN file, if the text font is mapped by the selected AutoCAD Conversion Mapping File (ACF) or Microstation Conversion Mapping file (MCF) to a Terramodel font, the text font will be substituted.
If the FNT file for a loaded font is missing and not substituted, message scroll displays a warning once, and any text in that font is displayed in the default font, usually TMODELF. To get rid of missing-font warning messages, you could:
- Change the font of the text using TEXTMETRICS or FONTCHNG.
- If the text was imported from DWG, DXF or DGN, add the missing font to the .ACF or .MCF conversion mapping file and import again into a new project.
- Place a FNT file of the right name in the Fonts folder. For example, use FONTC.EXE to convert an .SHP font.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
List all groups used by selected objects to the message scroll.
Groups are first sorted into numerical order. Group 0 is not listed.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 86 |
List geometry of lots
For each selected set, list the name, point numbers and the bearing, distance, (and arc and radius if relevant), of each segment.
If the set is closed, the area is shown.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 85 |
List as-constructed pipe data.
Compare natural surface points, with a design pipe and alignment.
Specify the Design HAL, top of pipe set, natural surface points and pipe diameter.
The report shows Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, RL (Top), Pipe cover, Trench depth, Segment grade and Deflection angle.
| 01/02/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
List reference files for a project.
List reference files for a project in the message scroll area.
You can copy and paste text from the message scroll.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
List text objects.
List selected text to a P3Pad report in easting order.
EAT codes are not converted.
See also TXTOUT.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Print a report of all the layers
Report all the layers in the project, the layer colours and linetype and the number of objects on each layer.
The same as LIST... Layers.
See also LLRPT which lists the layer lists and can be used to transfer layers from one project to another.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\List [Layers] | S |
Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.
See GCLLGRID which is based on LLGRID but has an improved dialog.
See also LLTABLE.
| 29/10/08 | HDMS\Coordinate\Draw latitude and longitude grid | S |
Assign a layer list to multiple dynaviews
Modify the layer list property of selected dynaviews.
| Command | Modify\Layer list | S | 90 |
Create and edit layer lists.
Add or delete layers from a layer list and designate which of those layers are to be shown with background prominence.
If a layer list is associated with a dynaview, only objects on layers on the layer list are displayed within the dynaview, even if the visibility of the layer is turned off. layer list names can have up to 16 characters.
For each layer list name, all layers are shown, but only the listed layers are highlighted in the central "Layers" window and shown in the background prominence window. Listed layers can be highlighted in the "Background prominence" window.
If "Use shift" is enabled in the Advanced settings of PLOTSET, the value of the colour shift is added to the colour number of objects on layers with background prominence in the dynaview. Similarly, the pen shift is added when plotting.
For example, if pens 65 to 128 are similar to pens 1 to 64 but with lighter colours (or thinner lines), for a dynaview showing design features to plot existing contours in the lighter colours, give the contour layer background prominence in the layer list used by that dynaview, and use a pen shift of 64.
The Capture command button selects the layers for the currently selected layer list by capturing the current layer visibility settings in LAYERSET.
Use the Save button to save the layer list configuration.
See also LLIST, DYNAVIEW, EDIT, GC32, LAYLSET and MOSSOUT.
| Command | Settings\Layer list settings | S | 90 |
Creates a table showing the block, lot, area and % area for each set selected.
The same as LIST... Lots.
See also LISTLOTS.
| 29/10/08 | Reports\List [Lots] | S | 64 |
Layer list report
Report each layer within each layer list to P3Pad.
The file LLRPT.CSV is also silently created in the project file location with layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype.
To include all layers, first use LAYERSET to make all layers visible, then LLISTSET to Capture the visible layers to a new layer list. Layers with no objects are included.
Because CREATELL can read LLRPT.CSV, you can transfer layers and layer lists from one project to another.
LLAYER reports the colours, linetype and number of objects for each layer.
| 01/09/11 | U | 90,180 |
Create a coordinate table of points including latitudes and longitudes.
Create a table of coordinates from selected points with columns for Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description, Latitude and Longitude.
- Points
- Select the points to be tabulated.
- Origin
- Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table
- Title
- Enter up to 61 characters for the title of the table in this edit text control. If you checked the Use Title Box check box, Terramodel will include the title at the top of the coordinate table.
- Field Number
- This column displays the order in which Terramodel will include the point parameters in the table. The first column of the table is field number 1, the second column field number 2, and so on.
- Width
- Enter the width, in number of characters, for the column of the table entry highlighted in the list box. There is no maximum width for columns. If any entries exceed the width you specify here, Terramodel will warn you.
- Heading
- Enter the heading that Terramodel will place at the top of the column for the table entry highlighted in the list box. The number of characters you can include in a heading depends on the width of the column for that table entry.
- Prefix
- Enter up to 13 characters for a prefix that Terramodel will include with each listing for the table entry highlighted in the list box. For latitudes and longitudes only, these characters will be used as a suffix instead.
- Value
- Select the value type for the table entry highlighted in the list box from this list box of point value types. Select from Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value), Elev (elevation), Desc (point name), Latitude, Longitude or None if you do not want to include a value for the column.
- General Properties
- This section lets you configure the general format of the table.
- Lines/Page
- Enter the number of lines of data for each page of the table in this integer control. Terramodel creates additional table pages for entries that cannot fit on a single table page, placing them at the same y-coordinate position and one inch apart to the right of the first page.
- Layer
- Select the layer on which the table will be stored from this layer control.
- Text style
- Select the text style in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this style control.
- Colour
- Select the colour in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this colour control. The table frame is drawn in the colour of the layer on which the table is drawn.
- Format of Latitude and Longitude
- Choose from DDD.d, DDD MM.m and DDD MM SS.s and specify the number of decimal places (0-6).
- The points are sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order.
- The eastings and northings update as the points are moved.
- To update the latitudes and longitudes, recreate the table.
- If a suitable "From" coordinate system has not already been configured, you will be notified to first use another command such as GCCOORD or GCLLGRID to load the "From" coordinate system for the points so the latitudes and longitudes can be computed.
See also CRDTABLE and GCLLGRID.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 |
Change the linetype of the current layer.
Open the linetype dialog so you can change the linetype of new sets and plines in the current layer.
This is the same as clicking on the linetype picker on the toolbar, or changing the linetype of the current layer using LAYERSET.
You can also change the linetype using an argument.
| Command | S | 2 |
Load or reload the specified attribute definition file.
| 29/10/08 | S |
List details of selected objects.
Includes the layer, type, number of elements (for plines and sets), colour, point number, font name and linetype.
The same as LIST... Objs.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\List [Objs] | S | 27 |
Create closed sets from sets enclosing selected text.
Create closed sets by tracing inside selected sets around locations at the insertion points of selected text objects.
Typically, the selected sets represent subdivision lots and the selected text represent lot numbers.
The new closed sets are created on the current layer with names derived from the corresponding text objects.
Similar to TRACEBDY and GCTRACE which only do one lot a time.
| 01/09/11 | S | 64 |
Label lot corners with existing and finished elevations.
Label selected points with text with values interpolated from nominated existing and finished dtm layers and settings for layer, style, prefix and offsets.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $200 | 93 |
List details of selected plines.
Includes the name, starting chainage, elevation, coordinates along the pline, and the radius associated with any vertex that has been curved, of selected plines.
The same as LIST... Plines.
| 01/09/11 | Reports\List [Plines] | S | 84 |
List the coordinates of the selected points.
List selected points with options to include Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number and General Information.
In the Geocomp Update, LPOINTS is aliased to GCLPTS which includes options for Group and Export to CSV. To list Layers, Objects, Unused Points, Sets, Plines or Lots, see LIST. To list radiations, see LPTSRAD. To list with heights as depths, see PORTSC1.
| 29/10/08 | RG 423 | Reports\List [Points] | S | 26 |
Change the points colour of the current layer.
Open the points colour dialog so you can change the colour number of new points in the current layer.
This is the same as clicking on the right-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the points colour of the current layer using LAYERSET.
You can also change the colour using an argument.
| Command | S | 2 |
List the coordinates and radiations of the selected points.
Similar to LPOINTS except it includes radiations from a stand point.
If you chose to change the point name to include the bearing and distance, you can use CRDTABLE to tabulate them.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 59 |
Label long sections in Geocomp-style.
Label selected profiles with a table beneath showing chainages, elevations and grades.
Select profiles in the profile view.
Select plotboxes for sections which extend over multiple sheets.
Vertical alignment details can be labelled on selected profiles.
Labels are referenced to the active alignment.
Click on label see the profile label settings dialog box where you can configure the layout, datum elevation, decimal places, text fonts and so on.
For each listed profile you can chose whether to label (Y/N) with design grades. Profiles with vertical curves will be marked Y by default.
You can chose to include superelevations, cut/fill differences, horizontal curve data and empty boxes.
You can also specify a layer list to show the extent, names and colours of user-defined closed plines and sets marking regions, such as tenure, trench material, pipe type and municipality, along the active alignment, stacked in reverse alphabetical layer name order.
A report lists the elevations of each profile by chainage to P3pad.
See also LVC, LSEC_UK and LABELVAL.
| 01/09/11 | built-in help | Draft\label profiles (LSEC1) | Geocomp Update or $275 | 493 |
Labels long sections in United Kingdom-style.
Refer to the extensive Terramodel help.
See also LSEC1, LVC and LABELVAL.
| 01/09/11 | Draft\Label profiles (UK) | S | 493 |
List set details
Includes the name, the number of points in the set, and the point numbers that form the selected sets.
The same as LIST... Sets.
| 29/10/08 | Reports\List [Sets] | S | 61 |
List the unused point numbers within the specified point number range.
The same as LIST... Upts.
| 29/10/08 | Reports\List [Unused] | S |
Label points along a vertical curve.
See also LSEC1, LSEC_UK and LABELVAL.
| 29/10/08 | S | 412 |
Edit layer properties.
Configure isolate, set/pline colour, point colour, linestyle, LListDTM.
See also LAYERSET.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 40 |
Play a keystroke macro.
Execute the instructions contained within a saved keystroke macro file.
You can pick macros from a drop down list of all .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM, such as C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros.
Specify a pause interval in milliseconds.
Click Run to execute the selected macro with the specified pause interval between each step.
A macro can be run from a toolbar. For example, to cascade views from the command line, type "macroplay cascade" to play our cascade.mac which is the same as picking Cascade from the Windows menu.
A macro can also be used in a command ALIAS. For example, if you create an alias with Command "macroplay" and Arguments "cascade", you can play the cascade macro by typing CASCADE at the command line. This new command can now also be used in a toolbox.
You can launch a macro when Terramodel starts by including macroplay in the target property of the Terramodel shortcut.
Macros are created by MACRORECORD.
To find Macros created by Geocomp Systems search this list for "Macro" or open DOCUMENTS then select Macros under Programming.
Keystroke macros are completely different to TMLs.
| Command | File\Macro\Play | S |
Record a keystroke macro.
Record series of keystrokes as a single command to run later.
When you run MACRORECORD, the message is displayed in the message scroll area: "Macro recording started. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording."
Then execute the Terramodel commands that you want to include in your macro.
Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording then save the macro giving it a suitable name.
Use MACROPLAY to execute the saved macro.
To enable interactive selection, such as picking objects with a mouse, use the Insert key to indicate the start the End key to indicate End of the selection.
While in macro-recording mode, use of the keyboard and mouse buttons is restricted to actions that can be replayed by Terramodel. You cannot select commands from menus using the mouse. You must navigate with keys such as Alt + "letter" combinations, Enter, Tab, key and cursor arrows and function keys.
Macros are saved as .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM. This is typically C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros or C:\Program Files\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros.
- Before creating or playing macros, turn off "Enable command completion" in FAVORITES.
- Before entering macros, move the mouse to the side of the desk and turn it upside down as a reminder not to use it.
- Don't use the up arrow cursor key to select a previously used command; type the command again
- Don't play a macro from a macro
- Don't play a macro from a toolbar
- Search the TML list to see if what you want has already be done
- Consider commissioning someone like Geocomp Systems to write a TML instead
- Backspaces and deletions will play as you typed them
- Take your time to get it right
| Command | File\Macro\Record | S |
Magnify the view scale by a factor.
Enter a factor for your view scale. A value greater than 1.0 expands the image, a value less than 1.0 shrinks the image.
Magnify can be used with arguments. For example, we alias ZI to "Magnify 1.5" meaning Zoom In x2 and ZO to "Magnify 0.5" meaning Zoom Out 2X.
| Command | View\Magnify | S | 134,135 |
Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS data.
Import NMEA strings from Magellan Explorist 600 GPS receivers.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import Magellan GPS data.
Import NMEA strings tagged as $PMGNWPL from Magellan GPS receivers.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Export Magellan GPS data.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Import MapInfo .MIF files.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 |
Export MapInfo .MIF files.
Map information is exported as .MIF.
A matching dummy .MID database file is also created, for those applications which require one, such as Trimble Pathfinder. If you need .MID files filled out, we can customise this TML to match your required fields.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $75 for .MIF, POA for custom .MID | 320 |
Create sets from point names using MAP file.
String points and place symbols using an ASCII mapping file.
Replaced by AUTODRAFT.
| Command | Draft/Linework from points | S | DC 4 |
Scale exploded masshaul diagram.
Scale and move objects in the sheet view created by exploding a MASSHAUL diagram, to a sensible coordinate system.
You can place the new diagram on View 8.
You should change the vertical exaggeration to suit the vertical scale in m³.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 | 477 |
Create a masshaul diagram.
Create a graph of earthwork volume against distance.
See Terramodel Help for more details.
Select Quick Explode to create a diagram in the sheet view.
Use MASSDIAG to rescale and rearrange the diagram and GCHAULMN to manage the hauls.
| Command | Roads\Masshaul\Diagram... | S | 477 |
Masshaul import and export locations.
Specify the chainages where material is imported or exported for a MASSHAUL diagram.
| Command | Roads\Masshaul\Import/Export | S |
Modify objects by matching properties of another object.
Once you pick the object to be matched, a dialog box is presented containing check boxes representing the properties associated with that object type.
Check the properties to apply to the selected objects. The selected properties of the picked object will then be assigned to the previously selected objects, where appropriate.
MATCH refers to the object to be matched as the "Ref Obj". This is not related to REFERENCE objects.
MATCH does not remember the previously selected properties you have to pick an object each time.
If MATCH remembers CAD properties and refers to "Picked Object", MATCH has been aliased to MATCHOBJ.
| 29/10/08 | RG 467 | Modify\Match | S | 40 |
Modify objects by matching properties of another object.
Once you pick the object to be matched, a dialog box is presented containing check boxes representing the properties associated with that object type.
Check the properties to apply to the selected objects. The selected properties of the picked object will then be assigned to the previously selected objects, where appropriate.
MATCHOBJ refers to the object to be matched as the "Picked object".
MATCHOBJ remembers CAD settings from the previous selection. MATCH may be aliased to MATCHOBJ, even though the command name is Match on the status line.
| 01/09/11 | RG 467 | Modify\Match | Geocomp Update or $25 | 40 |
Material manager.
List the materials for road design template, subgrade and existing surface managers.
See Terramodel Help for more detail.
See GCMATOUT and GCMATIN to import and export materials
| Command | Roads\Materials... | S |
Create a matrix of copies of selected objects.
Create multiple copies of selected objects in rows and columns.
Specify the number, spacing and bearing of the rows and columns.
| Command | Edit\Matrix | S |
Import MDL ALS *.CDU data.
Import .CDU data files from Quarryman Autoscanning Laser System (ALS) by Measurement Devices Ltd (MDL).
| 01/09/11 | POA |
Configure measurement units.
Set the project's unit of measure at the beginning of a project to match the unit of measure for entering coordinates and distances.
Select from feet, meters (=metres) and user defined. User defined units are added by programming a TML.
To designate the unit of measure to be used in the sheet view, click the Sheet Units box, and click your choice of inch, cm, mm, dm or m. For metric projects, we recommend cm otherwise point label blocks and cross sections will not be scaled correctly.
To convert existing project data to the new unit of measure, click the Convert units check box and select either International foot or U.S. Survey foot. When you Click OK, if you clicked the Convert Units check box, a Unit Conversion Warning dialog box appears asking if you want to convert your data. Click Yes to convert the data or No if you only want to change the labels and a second Unit Conversion Warning dialog box appears. Click Yes. See also SCALE and SCALELV.
| Command | File\Measurement units... | S | 44 |
Configure the menu.
Choose a menu configuration file.
Choose a menu from the .m files in the ...\Terramodel\Geocomp or ...\Locale\English folders.
The menu selection is stored in TMODWIN.INI for use with all projects. If no menu is specified, when Terramodel starts it uses the menu from \Locale\English that best suits the modules on your key.
The Geocomp Update adds Geocomp.m which best suits a typical installation of Terramodel with Geocomp Update. Geocomp+.m has more menus and commands. Viewer.m is is for viewing and measuring but not editing.
| Command | File\System configuration\Change menus... | S | CG F |
Merge two DTMs.
Create a merged DTM by copying an Inside DTM and that portion of an Outside DTM outside the extent of the Inside DTM.
The Inside layer is typically a Design surface, such as one created by DESIGN. The Outside surface is typically an existing surface. It must extend beyond the Inside surface, though it does NOT have to completely encompass the Inside surface. The Merged layer should start empty.
Set names are not transferred to the new layer.
See also GCMERGE, GCCLIP, GC33, GC33MULT and GCCOPY.
| Command | DTM\Merge layers... | S | 198 |
Toggle on or off the visibility of the message scroll display area above the command line.
MessageScroll is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY MESSAGESCROLLTOGGLE which simulates the Message scroll command in the Window menu.
See also CLEARMESS which clears the text from the message scroll.
| Macro | Window\Message scroll | S and User-definable |
Label triangle with centroid.
Creates a point at the centre of each triangle of a DTM surface.
The elevation of the point is equal to the slope of the triangle. The point is also labelled with the % slope and a triangle symbol indicating direction of slope.
Where there is a double triangle and no label, the slope is close to zero. If the text and arrow is too big, reduce the Plan View Scale ( try 20). The labels and symbols are placed on the current layer in the current line colour.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Import a cut/fill volume report for mass haul analysis.
Nominate a roadway and phases for MASSHAUL and import a cut/fill volume report in .CSV format.
See also GCHAULMN which has more options.
| 01/09/11 | U | 476 |
Import a MineMap file.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Copy objects to a mirror image.
Copy selected objects to new locations the same distances beyond an axis defined by two points as the current distances to that axis.
Labelling and some other parameters are not copied. The new objects retain the original layer names. Tables are not mirrored.
Text objects are still readable. If you want backwards text, EXPLODE to plines first.
See also GC93, MIRRORDY and GC56.
| Command | Modify\Mirror | S | 123 |
Mirror dynaviews about their Y axes.
Rotated dynaviews are also shifted.
| 29/10/08 | S |
Make an internal unit block.
Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block from selected Terramodel objects.
Define an insertion point, a Y scale point (for 2 and 3 point blocks) and a Z scale point (for 3 point blocks).
The selected objects are scaled into a 1 * 1 unit block. Use the measured point to point distances to scale the object. In order to have consistent results when you insert the block, you should orient a block from bottom to top (in the Y direction) and from left to right (in the X direction). EXPLODE any hatching and text into plines first.
- OBJS
- Select the objects that create the unit block.
- Ins:
- Define the insertion point for the unit block.
- Y:
- Select a location for the Y direction and scale. The distance from the insertion point to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the Y direction of the unit block. Two and three point blocks are rotated and scaled along the Y axis.
- X:
- Select a location for the X direction and scale. The distance from y-axis to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the X direction of the unit block.
- OK
- Click the OK button to create the unit block with a block name and (optional) description.
A unit block is created so that the critical dimension of the block in the plan view is one unit in size. This means that the placed block will be the size of one unit times the scale you enter. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and enter a scale of 3.50 when you place it, the tree block will be 3.50m across. UNITBLK and AUTODRAFT can use up to three block placement points. A one-point block is placed on the insertion point. A two-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1 and (0,1) at point 2. A three-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1, (0,1) at point 2 and (1,0) at point 3.
You can simply create multiple-point blocks using BLOCK Create if your block data is arranged with those coordinates. With MKBLK you can transform the block as you create it by selecting locations to be "Ins" (0,0 or point 1), "Y" (0,1 or point 2) and "X" (1,0 or point 3).
To create an external block use the Save option of the BLOCK command.
| 29/10/08 | Draw\Block\Make | S | 196 |
Convert external blocks to internal blocks.
Convert selected blocks from a list of external blocks into internal blocks.
You can also use the Modify function of BLOCK one block at a time.
Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
| 29/10/08 | RG 1236 | Draw\Block\Make internal | S | 196 |
Place a temporary marker at each point of a set or vertex of a pline.
No physical markers are created; when the screen refreshes the markers have gone.
| 01/09/11 | Draw\Mark\Vertices | S | F8,60,93, 137,194 |
Import Survey, Design and Models from Moss GENIO data.
Convert alignments, surveys, design strings and triangles.
Optionally, interpret codes using a .MIN mapping file.
See also MOSSMIN which extracts features codes from a MOSS GENIO file to create an initial .MIN file.
| 01/09/11 | ADD 9.7 353 | File\Misc. Import\Moss GENIO | S | FC M |
Create MOSS .MIN file from MOSS GENIO features.
The MOSS .MIN file is used by MOSSIN to map features in a MOSS GENIO file to desired Terramodel properties. MOSSMIN creates or adds to a .MIN file from the features in a MOSS GENIO file. Use the first 1, 2, 3 or 4 characters in the feature code.
Once the .MIN file has been created, manually edit the .MIN file to enter the corresponding properties for use by MOSSIN.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Export Moss GENIO data.
Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file.
In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types.
In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file
Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter.
The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.
| 01/09/11 | ADD 9.7 353 | File\Misc. Export\Moss GENIO | S | FC M |
Move objects to another location.
Move selected objects by the difference between a pair of entered X,Y (or X,Y,Z if 3D is ticked) coordinates.
If you only have the difference in X,Y, enter 0,0 in From.
To move objects from one layer to another, use RELAYER. To move objects from one View to another, use REVIEW.
To move a set, make sure you select the set and the points used to define the set.
If Dragging is ON in SYSTEM, you can see the objects as you move them. If Drag Text Quick is ON in DISPLAYSET, text is displayed as text boxes only during the move.
| Command | Modify\Move | S | 35 |
Move a pad DTM and display volumes.
Create batters from a pad DTM to another DTM and calculate the resulting cut and fill quantities.
Like DESIGN, the batters are projected at the slope settings of a closed series of sets around the pad DTM.
As you shift the points on the pad layer using the mouse, the cut and fill quantities are recomputed and displayed in the message area.
If you nominate a new elevation, the elevations of all points on the pad layer are updated so you get a horizontal pad. Therefore, if your pad includes crossfall or steps, or multiple elevations for any other reason, do not enter an elevation in MOVEPAD 
but use PADUP 
and PADDOWN 
to manually add or subtract a PADSHIFT 
to the elevation of points in a pad.
To automatically balance earthworks by iterating increments to the elevation of points in a pad with multiple elevations, see CUTFILL. See also SIDESLOPE.
| Command | Modify\Movepad | S | 71+DTMC+DTM3 |
Import Mincom Minescape grid data.
The layer is derived from column 4 in the data file.
The name/description is from the grid row and column numbers in dat file columns 4 and 5.
Columns 6, 7 and 8 are easting, northing and elevation.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Fix Help macros.
Enable Microsoft Windows programmatic macros by executing a local copy of Microsoft Fixit 50105
If Windows programmatic macros are not enabled on Windows Vista and Windows 7, in HELP Contents you will get the error message "There was a problem running the macros. (1037)" and internal links will not work.
MS Fixit 50105 modifies the Windows Registry.
For more details see Microsoft Support article 917607 "I cannot open Help that was created in the Windows Help format (WinHlp32.exe)".
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes.
Insert multiple-code separators into names of selected points before field codes used in an AutoDraft ADC file.
You can specify multiple field codes in a survey for a single point. For example, you can double-code a point as both the end of a fence and also the edge of a footpath.
AUTODRAFT joins points which have names which match Field codes with Lines in a specified AutoDraft Configuration (ADC) file. AutoDraft looks for field code characters in the block of characters before the first space and after a specified multicode character.
Some other Trimble applications, such as Business Center and Survey Controller, don't use multi-code characters. Instead, they identify each field code in a name by matching the first characters, and those after each space, against a different list of possible field codes.
MULTCODE modifies names of points which have been field-coded to suit those applications by inserting the AUTODRAFT multi-code character before each field code.
To create the list of field codes and multicode character for MULTCODE, open the ADC file in the AUTODRAFT editor, generate the Full Report and save as a text file.
| 16/10/12 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Create multiple copies of objects.
Copy selected objects to a location, as in COPY, but you can continue to copy to other locations.
To copy a group of points and shift their point numbers, first assign a starting point number in POINTSET.
To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, click OK without specifying the From and To locations.
Tick Lay to place objects on current layer, otherwise place on original layer.
| Command | Edit\MultiCopy | S |
Create a Digital Terrain Model from multiple layers.
Enable a layer to be used as a base for a multi-layer DTM. When the base layer is specified as a DTM, the member layers are treated as a single DTM.
The member layers are defined by creating a layer list with the same name as the base layer and including the desired layers as members of the layer list.
The MultiLayerDTM command controls the setting for the specified layer and then opens the Layer list setting dialog box so that the appropriate layer list can be created.
A layer that is a member of one multi-layer DTM cannot be a member of another multi-layer, and cannot be used as a single layer DTM.
The base layer must contain at least three points with elevations.
See also GCCOPY which is is easier to use.
| 29/10/08 | DTM\Define multilayer DTM | S | 43 |
Import Trimble PayDirt MultiPlane RTK Survey File.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Creates multiple dynaviews.
Create dynaviews of selected plotboxes in the selected view.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Import VAL from MX report.
The MX report is not very precise so neither are the resulting coordinates.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $100 |
Modify the name of selected objects.
Terramodel sometimes refers to the name as the Description.
| Command | Modify\Name | S | 10 |
Change the layer of selected objects to match name.
Specify the layer for objects with no name.
The selected objects may include text and blocks. Note that the name of a text object is the text.
See also LAY2NAME, PTLAYCOL, GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Rename unnamed sets to match point names.
Rename each selected set which has a blank name to match the name of the first named point in the set.
Specify the number of characters to be used from the beginning of the point name.
NAMESETS can be useful with MOSS GENIO conversions.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Start a new Terramodel project.
Open the prototype project, then save the project with a new name and location.
If you change the project type to ALN or RLN, the P29 Roadline or P39 Roadline 3D editor is opened for data entry. To start a new MP2 MultiPlane project, you will need MultiPlane.
See also GC02 for chainage and offset.
| Command | File\New | S | 1 |
Change the current view mode to the next open view.
NEXTVIEW is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY NEXTVIEW which executes Control-F6 on the keyboard.
| Macro | User-definable |
Change the name of selected objects using chainage of point from HAL.
See also GC02 for chainage and offset.
| 01/09/11 | U | 176 |
Draw a table of set or pline information
Table headings are chainage, northing, easting, radius, delta, length, tangent and deg. of curve.
| 01/09/11 | U |
Nikon NS-95 Database Utility
Manage data in a Nikon AP700 or AP800 database.
NS95 is a DOS utility from Nikon that can work with AP700 and AP800 survey jobs.
Preparing NS95
Create the Data directory
- Obtain a copy of NS95.EXE from your Nikon survey instrument supplier (or from C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp, if you have installed the Geocomp Update)
- Create a valid DOS (up to 8-character) data directory
- Copy NS95.EXE (and NS95.CFG if you have one) into the data directory, or add the location of NS95.EXE to the DOS path
- You can now run NS95 from the DOS directory
Create a Terramodel Alias
- Prepare NS95 as above
- Create a Terramodel ALIAS called NS95 with the command EXEC and the argument NS95. The NS95 alias is set by Geocomp Update.
- Set the Terramodel data directory to the NS95 data directory by opening or creating a project in that directory
The NS95 Menu
Type NS95 at the Terramodel command line (or run it from DOS). The initial menu options are:
[J]ob Manager
[A]dd Coordinates
[I]mport Coordinates
[E]xport File Data
[S]ettings
[C]ode & Parameter Files
Within each option, the functions shown on the bottom line are selected by function keys. For example, within the Job Manager press the F1 key for Create, F2 for Copy, etc. This replicates the behaviour of the Nikon instrument software. Use the Escape key to close a menu.
The Settings (for Units, etc) are saved in NS95.CFG.
An NS95 job consists of a number of database files. These typically have extensions DBC, DCI, DII, DPI and DTI. These jobs are typically created on PCMCIA cards by Nikon DTM 700 and 800 series total stations.
To get a survey job out of the database, either download the data from the instrument in Nikon ASCII Raw data format, or use NS95 to Export in [N]ikon v2.00 Raw File format.
To import the raw data into Terramodel, use the Geocomp Nikon Raw _i import script. Alternatively, use the Nikon script which communicates using the Remote Device Manager.
NS95 Command line parameters
NS95 can also be operated using command line parameters from DOS or Terramodel.
| Function | Switch | Parameters |
| Create AP800 job | /jcr | jobname jobdesc jobclient jobcomment |
| Create AP700 job | /jc7 | jobname jobdesc jobclient jobcomment |
| Copy job | /jcp | fromjob tojob |
| Move job | /jmv | fromjob tojob |
| Delete job | /jdl | jobname |
| Add point to job | /jad | jobname ptnum id north east elevation code |
| NS95 settings | /res | dmode amode hz coord tmode pmode sl cr scale crc azim |
| Import from text | /iac | jobname filename |
| Import civilsoft | /ics | jobname filename |
| Import order | /ior | importorder |
| Export coordinates | /eac | jobname filename |
| Export Civilsoft | /ecs | jobname filename |
| Export DXF | /edx | jobname filename |
| Export Nikon v1.0 | /en7 | jobname filename |
| Export Nikon v2.0 | /enr | jobname filename |
| Export SDR2x | /esd | jobname filename |
| Export TDS | /etd | jobname filename |
| Export Landsoft | /els | jobname filename |
| Prepare code file | /cod | textfile codefile |
| Version 2.20 24/01/01 | Nikon NS-95 Version 2.0 Instruction Manual (NS95_V20.pdf) | Geocomp Update or from your Nikon dealer | NS95 |
Automated Plan Set Assembly and Management Program. Register Object to Sheet Command.
This command is used to register objects drawn on a sheet by the user, to that sheet, or to a specific dynaview on the sheet originally created by PLANSET.
Register user-created objects with the sheet, so that when the sheet is moved or deleted, these objects are moved or deleted with it. This association is done using Groups.
There is one group number associated with each sheet. Objects of a general nature, not associated with a particular plan or profile dynaview, should be registered to the sheet. After selecting the objects to be registered to the sheet, click on the Sheet button to assign them to the sheet in which they lie. Since the program determines the appropriate sheet, you may include items from multiple sheets in the selection set when making a general assignment to a sheet. There are four group numbers associated with a plan or profile dynaview.
| 01/09/11 | RG 357 | Draft\ASAP-Plan Set\Object registration | S |
Enable running object snap modes.
Enable point snap modes, and order of precedence. The running snap modes are always active, but can be temporarily overridden by using a specific option of the point locate control.
Point snap modes allow more precision when locating and placing objects. As the various snap modes are enabled, they are included in the Order list to the right.
Change the order of precedence by dragging snap modes to different positions in the Order box. The top position has the highest precedence. If Free is included, any mode after Free will never be considered.
Running snap modes may cause other commands to appear as if they are not functioning, or act in an undesirable manner. If no object is found at a location that matches the enabled snaps, there is no response until Terramodel finds an object at another location. If Free is on the list, you will always get a location. Include Free if you want to be select by Windows but not if you must select an object.
See also SEARCH.
| Command | Settings\Running snaps | S |
Report vertical differences between obstructions.
Report the vertical difference between two sets.
If the sets cross more than once, the closest intersection to the location used to select the first set.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 |
Turn off selected objects.
The objects are turned of (made invisible) regardless of the SEARCH settings.
| Modify\On/Off\Object off | S | 48 |
Turn off all objects in the current view.
The objects are turned off (made invisible) regardless of the SEARCH settings.
| offall.txt | Modify\On/off\All off | Wencomp | 47 |
Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.
Pick the set, side, offset and elevation difference.
See also GCOFFELV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.
| 01/09/11 | Edit\Offset distance and elev | S | 71 |
Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset from multiple sets.
Specify multiple sets from which to offset.
| 01/09/11 | Geocomp Update or $25 | 71 |
Create set vertically offset from selected set.
Specify vertical offset and new layer name.
| 01/02/11 |